MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION 2000 Tybee...

3221 Ryan Street, Suite B

Lake Charles, LA 70601

Phone (337)-433-8166

Fax (337)-433-8167

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

2000 Tybee Lane

Lake Charles, LA 70605

PROJECT MANUAL Project No. MA1509 September 2016

MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION

ASSOCIATED DESIGN GROUP MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER 3909 West Congress St., Suite 201 Lafayette, LA 70506 Phone (337) 234-5710 Fax (337) 237-1467

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES

OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA TABLE OF CONTENTS


MOSS ARCHITECTS, INC. Page 1 of 3

DIVISION 0 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Information for Contractor General Conditions of the Contract for Construction Supplementary Conditions Bid Form Bid Bond Contract Change Order Summary Change Order Breakdown Certificate of Completion

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 012100 Allowances 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013300 Submittals 014000 Quality Requirements 014200 References 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017200 Project Record Documents 017300 Execution 017700 Closeout Procedures

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 033100 Concrete Work 033536 Stamped Concrete Overlay

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 040000 Mortar 042000 Unit Masonry 042530 Veneer Masonry

DIVISION 6 - WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061100 Wood Frame Construction 061700 Glued Laminated Timbers 062000 Finish Carpentry and Millwork

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071750 Masonry Water Repellent 072130 Insulation 072700 Air Barriers 073120 Asphalt Shingles 074600 Vinyl Siding and Accessories





074660 Fiber Cement Siding 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 081000 Steel Doors and Frames 081423 Clad Wood Doors 087100 Finish Hardware 088000 Glass and Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

092600 Gypsum Board Systems 093000 Ceramic-Porcelain Tile 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 096800 Carpeting 099000 Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 102600 Wall & Door Protection 104400 Signage 105230 Fire Extinguishers and Accessories

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 114520 Appliances and Equipment

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 123400 Laminate Clad Casework 125050 Window Treatments

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220000 Plumbing General Provisions 220500 Basic Materials and Methods 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221100 Water Supply 221300 Waste Water Disposal 224200 Plumbing

DIVISION 23 - HVAC 230000 HVAC General Provisions 230500 Basic Materials and Methods 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 230900 Temperature Controls 233000 Air Distribution 238000 HVAC Equipment





DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260500 Electrical General Provisions 260519 Wires and Cables 260529 Supporting Devices 260533 Raceways 260534 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 260535 Electrical Connections for Equipment 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 265100 Interior Lighting 265600 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 Site Clearing 312000 Earth Moving 312010 Earthwork 313116 Termite Control

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 Concrete Paving 324000 Benches

END OF TOC

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA INFORMATION FOR CONTRACTOR MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION


PART 1 - RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BID PROPOSAL A. Bid proposal is requested for the construction of:

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION B. The proposal will be received by David M. Moss, AIA Architect on Thursday, November 3,

2016 by 3:00 p.m. at:

Moss Architects, Inc. 3221 Ryan Street, Suite B Lake Charles, LA 70601 (337) 433-8166

PART 2 – PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS A. Performance Bond will be required. B. Payment Bond will be required.

PART 3 - AVAILABILITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Contract Documents are available via electronic copy from the following:

Moss Architects, Inc. 3221 Ryan Street, Suite B Lake Charles, LA 70601 (337) 433-8166 [email protected]

PART 4 - EXAMINE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND VISIT SITE A. Before submitting the proposal, the Contractor should carefully examine the contract

documents; visit the site of work at scheduled walk-through; fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and limitations, including those of labor; and shall include in the proposal a sum sufficient to cover the cost of all items contemplated by the Contract Documents.

PART 5 - DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS A. Should the Contractor find discrepancies in or omissions from the Contract Documents, or

should the Contractor be in doubt as to their meaning, the Contractor should at once notify the Architect, who will, time permitting, issue a written instruction in the form of an addendum to the Contractor. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for any oral explanations or interpretations of the Contract Documents.



PART 6 - ADDENDA A. All addenda issued during the time of bidding shall become a part of the Contract

Documents and receipt thereof shall be listed in the proposal.

PART 7 - INSURANCE AND BONDS

STANDERIZED INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

All policies and certifications of insurance of the Contractor/Subcontractor shall contain the following clauses:

The Owner's insurer will have no right of recovery or subrogation against the Agency, it being the intention of the parties that the insurance policies so affected shall protect both parties and the primary coverage for any and all losses covered by the below described insurance.

The Owner shall be named as an additional insured as regards to negligence by the contractor (ISO Forms CG 20 10 11 85).

The insurance companies issuing the policy or policies shall have no recourse against the Agency for payment of any premiums or for assessments under any form of policy.

Any and all deductibles in the below described insurance policies shall be assumed by and be for the amount of, and at the sole risk of the Contractor or Subcontractor.

Insurance

The Contractor/Subcontractor, prior to commencing work, shall provide at his own expense, proof of the following insurance coverage’s required by the contract to the Owner in insurance companies authorized in the State of Louisiana. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with an A. M. Best's rating of no less than A-:VI. This rating requirement will be waived for the worker's compensation coverage and policies written through Lloyds of London or Institute of London Underwriter (ILU) companies.

Thirty days prior notice of cancellation shall be given to the Owner by registered mail, return receipt requested, on all of the required coverage provided to the Agency. All notices will name the Contractor/Subcontractor and identify the contract number.

Insurance coverage specified in the GENERAL CONDITIONS (AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition) to be provided by the Contractor, and any other insurance described below shall be furnished with the following minimum limits:

Worker's Compensation - Statutory - in compliance with the Compensation Law of the State Exception: Employers liability to be $1,000,000 when work is to be over water and involves maritime exposures.

Commercial General Liability Insurance with a combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. This insurance shall include coverage for bodily injury and property damage, and indicate on the Certificate of Insurance which of the seven (7) coverage’s required below are not included in the policy, if any:

1. Premises - Operations; 2. Broad Form Contractual Liability; 3. Products and Completed Operations; 4. Use of Contractors and Subcontractors;



5. Personal Injury; 6. Broad Form Property Damage; 7. Explosion, Collapse and Underground (XCU) Coverage.

NOTE: On the certificate of insurance, under the description of operations, the following wording is required: THE AGGREGATE LOSS LIMIT APPLIES TO EACH PROJECT, or a copy of ISO form CG2503 (Ed. 11-85) shall be submitted.

COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (CSL) - AMOUNT OF INSURANCE REQUIRED

Type of Construction

Projects Under $100,000

Projects $100,001 - $1,000,000

Projects Over $1,000,000

New Buildings: Each Occurrence/ Minimum Limit

$500,000 $1,000,000 $3,000,000

Aggregate (Applicable to this contract ONLY) $500,000 $1,000,000 $3,000,000

Each Occurrence/ Minimum Limit

* $500,000 (Depends on Building Value)

* $1,000,000 (Depends on Building Value)


Aggregate (Applicable to this contract ONLY)

* $500,000 (Depends on Building Value)



Business Automobile Liability Insurance with a combined single limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage, unless otherwise indicated. This insurance shall include for bodily injury and property damage the following coverage:

1. Owned automobiles; 2. Hired automobiles; 3. Non-owned automobiles;

An Umbrella Policy may be used to meet minimum requirements.

All property losses shall be made payable to and adjusted with the Owner.

All policies of insurance shall be approved by the Owner prior to the inception of any work.

Other insurance required is as follows:

Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance shall be furnished by the Contractor and naming the Owner as the Insured.

Projects Under $100,000

Projects $100,001 - $1,000,000

Projects Over $1,000,000

CSL - Each Occurrence $500,000 $1,000,000 $3,000,000

Asbestos Abatement Liability (required when asbestos abatement is included in the work)

The contractor or subcontractor who will be doing the asbestos abatement as outlined in this contract shall obtain and maintain such liability coverage for the asbestos abatement hazard and exposure with minimum limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence for the duration of the project. The policy shall name the Owner as an additional insured of the project.



The policy shall be written on an "occurrence" form without a sunset clause. Claims-made coverage is unacceptable. The insurance company shall have an A.M. Best rating of least A-:VI or better or written through Lloyds of London or Institute of London Underwriter (ILU) Companies.

SUBCONTRACTORS

Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates for each subcontractor. All coverage’s for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS

Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. The cost of such insurance shall be included in the Contractor's bid.

MINIMUM SCOPE OF INSURANCE

Coverage shall be at least as broad as:

Insurance Services Office form number GL 0002 (Ed. 1/73) covering Comprehensive General Liability and Insurance Services Office form number GL 0404 covering Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability; or Insurance Services Office Commercial General Liability coverage ("occurrence" form CG 0001). "Claims Made" form is unacceptable. The "occurrence form" shall not have a "sunset clause".

Insurance Services Office form number CA 0001 (Ed. 1/78) covering Automobile Liability and endorsement CA 0025 or CA 0001 12 90. The policy shall provide coverage for owned, hired, and non-owned coverage. If an automobile is to be utilized in the execution of this contract, and the vendor/contractor does not own a vehicle, then proof of hired and non-owned coverage is sufficient.

Worker's Compensation insurance as required by the Labor Code of the State of Louisiana, including Employers Liability Insurance.

MINIMUM LIMITS OF INSURANCE

Contractor shall maintain limits no less than:

Commercial General Liability: $500,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage (or higher limits depending on size of contract.)

Automobile Liability: $500,000 combined single limit per accident, for bodily injury and property damage (or higher limits depending on size of contract).

Workers Compensation and Employers Liability: Worker's Compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of Louisiana and Employers Liability coverage. Exception: Employers liability limit is to be $1,000,000 when work is to be over water and involves maritime exposure.



PROPERTY INSURANCE

Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurable value equal to the Contract Sum.

The Contractor is to provide "Builder's Risk Insurance" to protect the Owner, Contractor, and their subcontractors as their interests may appear. The policy insures against "All risk" of direct physical loss or damage subject to certain exclusions and limitations.

Flood Insurance shall be included as part of “Builder’s Risk” Policy.

If not covered under the insurance provided in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall affect and maintain similar Property Insurance for portions of the work stored off the site or in transit when such portions of the work are to be included in an Application for Payment.

RECORDATION OF CONTRACT AND BOND [38:2241A(2)]

"The Contractor shall record within thirty (30) days the Contract Between Owner and Contractor and Performance and Payment Bond with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in which the work is to be performed."

PART 8 - COMPLETION TIME

The Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on a date specified in a

written "Notice to Proceed" by the Owner and to fully complete the project within (210) consecutive calendar days thereafter, or within the time as may be extended as stipulated in the Contract Documents. The Bidder acknowledges that time is of the essence in the completion of this project.

PART 9 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

The Bidder hereby also agrees to pay as liquidated damages the sum of ($500) for each consecutive calendar day which the work is not complete beginning with the first day beyond the specified completion time.

PART 10 - LICENSE CERTIFICATION The Bidder certifies that he meets all licensing requirements of the State of Louisiana and is duly and currently licensed under R.S. 37:2151-2163.

END OF INFORMATION FOR CONTRACTOR

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION MOSS ARCHITECTS, INC. Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACT FORM

A. The following shall govern the bidding and the contract. Copies are on file in the Architect's office, and may be reviewed upon request. Copies of AIA Documents may be purchased from the American Institute of Architects or from the office of the architect for $5.00/each.

1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition.

END OF SECTION

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION MOSS ARCHITECTS, INC. Page 1 of 4

These Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of the Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.

Articles, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs or Clauses modified or deleted have the same numerical designation as those occurring in the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

§1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS §1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Delete the third sentence, and add the following sentence: “The Contract Documents shall include the Bidding Documents as listed in the Instructions to Bidders and any modifications made thereto by addenda.”

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS

§5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK §5.2.1 Delete this subparagraph and substitute the following: "Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish at the Pre-Construction Conference, to the Owner and the Architect, in writing, the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the work. No Contractor payments shall be made until this information is received."

§5.2.2 Delete this subparagraph and substitute the following: “The Contractor shall be solely responsible for selection and performance of all subcontractors. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claims for additional time and/or an increase in the contract sum for a problem with performance or non-performance of a subcontractor.”

§5.2.3 and §5.2.4 Delete these subparagraphs and substitute the following: The contractor shall notify the owner when a subcontractor is to be changed and substituted with another subcontractor.

§5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS - Delete this paragraph.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

§7.1 GENERAL

Add the following paragraph: §7.1.4 As part of the pre-construction conference submittals, the contractor is to submit the following prior to the commencement of work.

Fixed job site overhead cost itemized with documentation to support daily rates. Bond Premium and Insurance Rate, as a percentage, with supporting information from the General Contractor’s carrier. §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS - Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: §7.2.1 "A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time."

§7.2.1.1 The cost to the Owner resulting from a change in the work shall be the sum of:

Contractor's material and labor cost. Subcontractor's and/or Sub-Subcontractor's (as defined in Article 5) material and labor cost. Overhead and profit.

§7.2.1.2 The credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the work shall be the sum of:

Contractor's material and labor cost. Subcontractor's and/or Sub-Subcontractor's material and labor cost. Credit will not be required for overhead and profit.

§7.2.2 The Contractor will be due Extended Overhead for time delays only when complete stoppage of work occurs causing a contract completion extension. The stoppage must be due to acts or omissions solely attributable to the Owner. In all cases the Contractor is to notify the Designer in writing as required by article 15.1.2.


§7.2.3 Before a Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall provide and deliver to the Architects the following information, not subject to waiver, within ten (10) days after being notified to prepare said Change Order:

An itemized list of material and labor costs for Contractor's work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor and each item of material. Construction Contract Change Order Summary Form for each change order item. Use form included in Project Manual.

§7.2.4 "Overhead and profit shall be computed by one of the following methods but shall not exceed a total of 25% on any portion of work:

§7.2.4.1 When all of the work is General Contract work; 15% of the cost of the work for overhead and profit.

§7.2.4.2 When the work is all Subcontract work; 15% of the cost of the work for Subcontractor's overhead and profit plus 10% of the cost of the work, not including the Subcontractor's overhead and profit, for General Contractor's overhead and profit.

§7.2.4.3 When the work is a combination of General Contract work and Subcontract work; that portion of the cost that is General Contract work shall be figured per 7.2.4.1 and that portion of the cost that is Subcontract work shall be calculated per 7.2.4.2.

Bond premiums may be included, but after the markup is added to the cost of the work. §7.2.5 After a change order has been approved, no follow-on requests for extensions of time or additional cost shall be considered for the work included in that change order.

§7.2.6 Cost of work for the purpose of Change Order's shall be costs necessarily incurred in performance of the work and paid by the Contractor which shall consist of:

Wages Paid Cost of all materials and supplies Cost of necessary machinery and equipment Cost of applicable taxes, insurance, fringe benefits, unemployment compensation, social security, and any other documents costs.

§7.2.7 Subcontract cost shall consist of the items in 7.2.6 above plus overhead and profit as defined in 7.2.4.

§7.2.8 Cost of work whether Contractor's to Subcontractor's cost shall not apply to the following:

Salaries or other compensation of the Contractor's personnel at the Contractor's principal office and branch offices. Any part of the Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on the Contractor's capital employed for the work. Overhead and general expenses of any kind or the cost of any item not specifically and expressly included in Subsection 7.3.6.

Cost of supervision not specifically required by the Change Order. Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly employed by any of them, or for whose acts any of them, may be liable, including but not limited to the correction of defective or nonconforming work, disposal of material and equipment wrongly supplied, making good any damage to property, or delays caused by failure to provide adequate Change Order documentation.

§7.2.9 When applicable as provided by the Contract, the cost to Owner for Change Orders shall be determined by quantities and unit prices. The quantity of any item shall be as submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. Unit prices shall cover cost of material, labor, equipment, overhead and profit.

ARTICLE 8 TIME

§8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

§8.2.1 Delete this subparagraph and substitute the following: "Time is of the essence and completion of the work must be within the Time for Completion stated in the Agreement, subject to such extensions as may be granted under section 8.3. The Contractor agrees to commence work not later than fourteen (14) days after the transmittal date of Written Notice to Proceed from the Owner and to substantially complete the project within the time stated on the contract. The Owner will suffer financial loss if the project is not substantially complete in the time set forth in the Contract Documents. The contractor and the Contractor's Surety shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum stated in the Contract Documents as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day (Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays included) of delay until the work is substantially complete. The Owner shall be entitled to the sum stated in the Contract Documents. Such Liquidated Damages shall be withheld by the Owner for the amounts due the Contractor for progress payments.

§8.2.2 Delete this subparagraph


§8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME §8.3.1 In the first sentence after the words "owner pending' delete the words "mediation and arbitration" and add the word "litigation" and add the following after "determine": ", subject to Owner's approval of Change Order. If the claim is not made within the limits of Article 15 all right for future claims for that month are waived."

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

§9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Delete this paragraph and substitute the following:

§9.2.1 At the Pre-construction Conference, the contractor shall submit to the Owner and the Architect a Schedule of Values prepared as follows:

§9.2.1.1 The attached Schedule of Values Format shall be used. If applicable, the cost of work for each section listed under each division shall be given. The cost for each section shall include labor, materials, overhead and profit.

§9.2.1.2 The Total of all items shall equal the Total Contract sum. This schedule, when approved by the Architect, shall be used only as a basis for the contractor's applications for payment.

§9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT §9.3.1 and §9.3.2 Delete these subparagraphs in their entirety and substitute the following:

§9.3.1 "Monthly, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an Application & Certificate for Payment on the AIA Document G702-1992, accompanied by AIA Document G703-1992, and supported by any additional data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or the Architect may require. Application for Payment shall be submitted on or about the first of each month for the value of labor and materials incorporated into the work and of materials, suitably stored, at the site as of the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month, less normal retainage as follows:

§9.3.1.1 Projects with Contract price up to $500,000.00 - 10% of the Contract price.

§9.3.1.2 Projects with Contract price of $500,000.00, or more - 5% of the Contract price.

§9.3.1.3 The normal retainage shall not be due the Contractor until after substantial completion and expiration of the forty-five day lien period and submission to the Architect of clear lien certificate and invoice for retainage.

§9.3.2 "Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payments for materials or equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, including applicable insurance."

§9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS §9.6.1 Delete this subparagraph and substitute the following: “After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment within twenty days.”

§9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Delete this paragraph.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

§10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.2.2 In the first sentence, between the words "bearing on" and "safety”, add the words "the health and",

§10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

§10.3.1 In the second sentence after "(PCB)" add "or lead"

§10.3.2 After the first sentence, delete all from "Unless". Add at the end "The Contract time shall be extended appropriately."

§10.4 EMERGENCIES Delete this paragraph and substitute the following: "In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect immediately of the emergency, simultaneously acting at his discretion to prevent damage, injury, or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor or account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 15."

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS Delete this Article in its entirety. Insurance requirements are covered in the "Instructions to Bidders".


ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

§14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 Add the following clause:

§14.2.1.5 "Fails to complete the punch list within the lien period as provided in 9.8".

§14.2.3 Add the following sentence at the end: "Termination by the Owner shall not suspend assessment of liquidated damages against the surety."

§14.2.5 Add this subparagraph: "If an agreed sum of liquidated damages has been established, termination by the Owner under this article will not relieve the Contractor and/or surety of his obligations under the liquidated damages provisions and the Contractor and/or surety shall be liable to the Owner for per diem liquidated damages."

BID FORM TO: Dermatology Associates of SWLA BID FOR: Dermatology Associates of SWLA 2000 Tybee Lane MOHS Suite & Resource Room Addition Lake Charles, La 70605 The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by:

Moss Architects, Inc., 3221 Ryan Street, Suite B, Lake Charles, LA 70601 and dated September 2016

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the

Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) __________________________________________ . TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of:

Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices designated as alternates in the unit price description. Alternate No. 1 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 2 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 3 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ ) NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

DATE: _______________________

BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check is attached to and made a part of this bid.

BID BOND

BB-1

DATE:

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT of as Principal, and and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the , in the full and just sum of

five (5%) percent of the total amount of this proposal, including all alternates, lawful money

of the United States, for payment of which sum, well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by those presents. Surety represents that it is listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies and that it is listed thereon as approved for an amount equal to or greater than the amount for which it obligates itself in this instrument, that surety currently is licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana, and that this bond is countersigned by a person who is under contract with the surety as a licensed agent in this state and who is residing in this state. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, whereas said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal to the obligee on a Contract for: NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Contract be awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall, within such time as may be specified, enter into the Contract in writing and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract with surety acceptable to the obligee, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the obligation shall become due and payable. , Principal Date , Surety

��

��

� ��

��

��

!��"��#�� $

% �� & �� '��()�$ *�+�,-&$

!'#� �� !��"��$

% �� % ��

� � �� ./ .0�$

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

!'#� �� % �� !'�� '��.$

!'#� �� /!'#� �� ()� !'�� '��$

�� ()� �!'#� �� &

!'�� '��.�� ()��$ *�+�,1&$

% ��!'#� �� !'#� �� /�()�/�� ()�$

�"��2��!'#� �� !'� �% �� % ��!'#� �� $

�� )��3�� 4��'�� &

�"��2��!'#� �� )��3�� 4��'��$

!'� ��"��2��!'#� �� 3�� $

.��"�'�� 2��'�"�� 2�� $

��

��

. �

�()�

!'#� �� *�+,-&$

�

��

.� '��#� ��

��3��#� �� '��"��2��#3

'��"��2��#3

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !"��#�� $��!��

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,��-��. /

�� 0�� 0�� 0�� $��!��

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

1��2��3��"��4��5 ,��$�6. /

�� 0�� 0�� 0�� $��!��

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

1��2��3��"��4��5 ,��$�6. /

� 7� /1��,8�7�5

�� !

�� !

��!

��!

�"#�$� ��!

1%)/��68��22!��!�5

��%��&� ��&��'��(��)��

��


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SUMMARY

MOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION SECTION 011000


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

A. The Work as defined in the General Conditions and described in the Contract Documents prepared by the Architect is summarized as follows:

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA


1.2 RELATED WORK NOT IN CONTRACT (N.I.C.)

A. Items "Not in Contract" are specifically marked NIC or N.I.C.

1.3 INSTALLATION OF OWNER PROVIDED AND ALLOWABLE PRODUCTS

A. The contractor shall provide accessories and installation of such products, unless

specified otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 011000


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA ALLOWANCES



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ALLOWANCES

A. The cash allowances enumerated below include labor, materials, equipment and all appurtenances required for complete installation.

1. Contingency: $10,000




DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES PROJECT MANAGEMENT

OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA & COORDINATION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 LIMITATIONS ON USE OF THE SITE

A. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage, materials and equipment on site.

B. Notify Owner one week in advance if any utilities or existing building functions are to be disrupted. This shall include the following:

1. Excessive noise and/or vibration

2. Site circulation disruptions


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. After notification that the Contract has been executed, the Architect shall arrange with the Owner and Contractor and conduct a pre-construction conference to be held at the project site. The Contractor shall be responsible to see that his principal subcontractors are in attendance and shall furnish to the Architect and the Owner the following:

1. Schedule of Values.

2. Construction Schedule, indicating start and finish dates for all Phases.

3. Names, phone numbers, and email addresses of all contact personnel.

4. Bond premium and insurance rates with supporting information from the General Contractor's carrier.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Contractor will hold a pre-installation meeting at the project site well before installation of each unit of work which requires coordination of other work. Installer and representatives of the manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or affected by that area of work or its coordination and integration with other work shall attend this meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

B. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require the installer of each major unit of work to inspect the substrate to receive work and conditions under which the work is to be performed.

1. Installer's commencement of work indicates contractor's acceptance of the substrate as being suitable for his work.

DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATES PROJECT MANAGEMENT

OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA & COORDINATION



C. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work as the integral step of starting installation.

3.3 MONTHLY MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall attend a monthly meeting at the project site with a representative of the Owner and the Architect. The purpose of the meetings will be coordination of scheduling as well as to provide information as to the status of the construction.

3.4 JOB COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall make tie-in to existing facility after hours, weekends, or holidays.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's schedule for replacing existing carpet in existing building.

C. New work shall not interrupt existing building operations or the ability to continue to see patients.

D. Contractor shall be limited to areas around perimeter of building and designated parking areas.

E. Contractor shall keep site around perimeter of building and designated parking area clean and in order at the end of each day.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SUBMITTALS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Deliver submittals to: Moss Architects, Inc., 3221 Ryan Street, Suite B, Lake Charles, Louisiana 70601, (337) 433-8166.

B. Transmit each item identifying project, contractor, subcontractor, major supplier, pertinent drawing sheet and detail number and specification section number, as appropriate. Notify the Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

1. Fax transmittals are not acceptable without prior approval.

C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the contract documents.

D. Do not begin with fabrication of work which requires submittals until return of submittals from Architect with indication that no exception is taken.

E. After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal.

F. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

G. Architect's checking of shop drawings, submittals, and samples is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Architect's review does not relieve Contractor of his responsibilities.

1. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site.

2. Contractor is responsible for fabrication processes and techniques of construction.

3. Contractor is responsible for coordination of the work of all the trades, and for the satisfactory performance of all of the work.

1.2 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES

A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule.

B. Affix stamp with initials or signature and indicate either requirements for re-submittal or note that no acceptance is taken to submittal.

C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission.





1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Construction Progress Schedule

1. After receipt of Notice to Proceed and before commencement of construction, submit Construction Progress Schedule to Architect. After review by Architect revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised Schedule with each Application for Payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal.

2. Comply with Progress Schedule for submittals related to work progress. Coordinate submittal of related items.

3. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of Work as of time of each progress Application of Payment.

4. Show submittal dates required for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, and Product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and those under Allowances.

B. Schedule of Values

1. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after award of contract. After review by Architect revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedule with each application for payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal.

2. Submit typed Schedule on AIA Form G703; Contractor's standard form or media driven printout will be considered upon request.

3. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each item with number and title of the major specification sections.

4. Include in each line item amount of allowances. For unit cost allowances, give quantities measured from contract documents multiplied by the unit cost equal to the total for each item.

5. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.

6. Provide a sub-schedule for each separate stage of work specified.

7. Revise schedule to list change orders for each application for payment.

C. Bond Premium and Insurance Rates:

1. Submit bond premium and insurance rates with supporting information from insurance carrier.





D. Shop Drawings

1. Review shop drawings prior to submission to determine and verify:

a. Field construction criteria

b. Catalog numbers and similar data

c. Conformance with specifications

2. Before submitting to Architect, submittals shall contain the following:

a. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions.

b. Project title and number.

c. Contract identification.

d. Names of Contractor, supplier, and manufacturer.

e. Identification of the product with the specification section number.

f. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.

g. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.

h. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.

i. Identification of deviations from contract documents.

j. Identification of revisions on re-submittals.

k. An 8" x 3" blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps.

l. Contractor's signed stamp certifying the review of the submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of contract documents.

3. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail schedule or room numbers shown on contract drawings.

4. Submission Requirements for Shop Drawings:

a. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other contractor.

b. Submit three (3) copies for Architectural and (5) copies for Engineering submittals.

5. If the Contractor has failed to complete the review as outlined above, the shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor without a review from the Architect or Engineer. Any delay to the contract time will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

6. Resubmission Requirements for Shop Drawings:

a. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect and resubmit until no exception is taken.

b. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those required by the Architect.





E. Product Data

1. Preparation:

a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.

b. Show performance characteristics and capacities.

c. Show dimensions and clearances required.

d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

2. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:

a. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the Work.

b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work.

3. Submission Requirements for Product Data:


b. Submit three (3) copies.

4. Resubmission Requirements for Product Data


b. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect.

F. Samples

1. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:

a. Functional characteristics of the product with integrally related parts and attachment devices.

b. Full range of color, texture and pattern.

2. Field samples and mockups:

a. Contractor shall erect at the project site at a location acceptable to the Architect.

b. Size or area: That specified in the respective specification section.

c. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.

d. Remove mockups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to the Architect.

3. Submission Requirements for Samples:


b. Number of samples required: Submit the number stated in each specification section.





4. Resubmission Requirements for Samples:


b. Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.





OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA QUALITY REQUIREMENTS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. General Quality Control

B. Mockups

C. Testing Laboratory

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Requirements, abbreviations and acronyms as referenced in Section 014200.

B. ASTM C945- Test for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete.

C. ASTM-329- Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as used in construction.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL

A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work of specified quality.

1.4 MOCKUP

A. Erect field samples and mock-ups at project site in accordance with requirements of the applicable specification section.

1.5 TESTING LABORATORY

A. General Requirements

1. An independent testing laboratory will be employed by Contractor. Contractor shall pay for laboratory services to perform specified testing.

a. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services.

B. Qualifications of Laboratory

1. Laboratory shall meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.

2. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in the State of Louisiana.





C. Laboratory Duties

1. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor. Provide qualified personnel after due notice.

2. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction:

a. Comply with specified reference standards.

b. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of contract documents.

3. Promptly notify Architect of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work.

4. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection to Architect. Each report shall include:

a. Date issued

b. Project title and number

c. Testing lab name, address and telephone number

d. Name and signature of laboratory inspector

e. Welder's identification number

f. Date and time of sampling or inspection

g. Record of temperature and weather conditions

h. Date of test

i. Identification of specification section

j. Location of sample or test in the project

k. Member tested for structural steel testing

l. Type of inspection or test

m. Results of tests and compliance with contract documents

n. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect.

5. Perform additional tests as required by Architect.

D. Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory

1. Laboratory is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of contract documents.

2. Laboratory is not authorized to approve or accept any portion of the work.

3. Laboratory is not authorized to perform any duties of the Contractor.

E. Contractor's Responsibilities

1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to the work.

2. Secure and deliver to the lab adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.

3. Provide to the lab the design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.





4. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to work to be tested.

b. To obtain and handle samples at the project site.

c. To facilitate inspections and tests.

d. For storage and curing of test samples.

5. Notify laboratory 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

a. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, Contractor shall notify the laboratory.





OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA REFERENCES



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Drawings are those encountered in the List of Drawings and identified in the Agreement. The Drawings, in many instances, are schematic and do not define exact locations of every part and piece of equipment. Items furnished may vary in dimension from the specific items called for in the Contract Documents. In such cases, determine exact position of each part by "on the job" measurements and drawings from equipment suppliers. Coordinate with other work.

B. Each Specification Section governs the complete work of the title, along with work related to the title, no matter where such work is shown on the drawings or mentioned in the specifications.

1. The outline form is used to omit repetitious use of words or word groups such as: "furnish and install", "Contractor shall", and other similar statements. Such words omitted from the text shall be construed to be included just as if they were repeated each time.

C. The Contractor shall perform all work shown, mentioned or inferred and shall comply with all work restrictions.

D. The Contractor shall perform all work and/or provide all equipment or devices, regardless of where included in the project manual (specifications) or on the construction drawings.

E. Any and all work performed and/or equipment or devices provided shall be complete and operational to satisfy the intent of the contract documents.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS

A. Any material or operation specified by reference to published Specification of a Manufacturer, a Society, an Association, a Code, or other published Standard, shall comply with requirements of the listed document which is current and has been officially published on date of receipt of bids. In case of a conflict between referenced document and contract documents, or between referenced documents, the one having more stringent requirements shall govern.

B. The Contractor, when requested, shall furnish a sworn affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that materials and manufactured products delivered to the job meet requirements specified. However, such affidavit shall not relieve the Contractor for responsibility of complying with any added requirements of Contract Documents.

C. A list of abbreviations for names of technical societies, organizations, and agencies referenced in the Contract Documents is available from the Architect.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. General: Provisions of this Section simplify and do not modify provisions of the General Conditions.

1. This section specifies temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection.

2. Unless indicated to be optional, temporary services and facilities are Contract requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:

1. Building Code requirements.

2. Health and safety regulations.

3. Utility company regulations.

4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.

5. Environmental protection regulations.

6. Americans with Disabilities Act.

B. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test temporary utilities before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Familiarity with Site: It is understood that prior to bidding the Contractor became familiar with the conditions existing at the site, and accepts the site and access conditions as they are.

B. Temporary Facilities: Contractor shall arrange and pay for all utilities required for construction and testing purposes until such time after project is substantially complete and/or Owner takes possession of building. Provide adequate water, electric power and light, temporary heat and cooling as required for proper execution, inspection and testing of the work.





C. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist. Do not obstruct means of access and emergency egress.

D. Use of Site: The Contractor and subcontractors shall locate offices, materials storage, equipment storage and maintenance area, and similar major facilities in permitted areas which do not interfere with operations required under the Contract and operations by the Owner and Owner's separate contractors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new or undamaged previously used materials and equipment in serviceable condition. Provide material and equipment suitable for the use intended.

B. Temporary Structures: If necessary, for protection of materials and equipment, provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, and serviceable finishes. Provide units on foundations adequate to distribute loads safely and avoid damage to supporting structure.

C. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.

D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable fire extinguishers. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. Comply with specific requirements of other Sections, such as metal work and roofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Temporary Facilities: Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work and continuing use of the building. Relocate and modify facilities as necessary for properly performing the work.

B. Duration of Use: Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.





C. Use of Permanent Facilities: Subject to approval by the Owner, permanent items (lights, air handling equipment, electric distribution system, and similar facilities) may be utilized by the Contractor to replace temporary facilities. Contractor shall be responsible for proper operation and maintenance of permanent facilities which are used during the construction period, and shall repair or replace all damaged components, restore consumable supplies and clean interior and exterior surfaces before Substantial Completion.

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance.

2. Provide temporary throwaway type filters for air handling equipment; change filter as needed, but not less often than every 4 weeks. Do not operate air-handling equipment without filters.

3. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Water and electric power for construction purposes will be available to the Contractor from existing municipal or parish distribution systems. Contractor shall be responsible for determining connection points. At conclusion of temporary use, Contractor shall restore connection points to original condition, or better. New in-service outlets and fixtures in construction areas may be utilized; item damages as a result of use for construction purposes shall be replaced with new ones. Contractor is responsible for coordinating and verifying all existing access points to utilities for temporary services with utility companies.

B. Water Service:

1. Contractor shall provide piping, hoses, backflow preventers, valves and other items necessary to conduct water from connection point to the construction location.

2. Contractor shall supervise use of water to prevent waste and prevent damage due to leaking and uncontrolled discharge.

3. Contractor shall provide sanitary drinking supply and paper cups for workers.

C. Electric Power Service:

1. Contractor shall provide extension cords, wiring, switches, disconnects, fuses, lamps and receptacles, and other items necessary to conduct electricity from connection point to the construction location.

2. Contractor shall supervise use of electricity to prevent waste and prevent injury and damage to the building due to improper and unsafe use, including but not limited to overloading and absence of grounding.

D. Temporary Lighting: Whenever natural light is inadequate and existing or new overhead lighting is not in operation, provide temporary lighting with local switching as necessary for operations under way.





1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

2. Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship. Finishing work will not be permitted in areas that are not adequately lighted.

3. Provide and maintain lights and signs to prevent damage or injury. Keep safety lights burning from dusk to dawn.

E. Sewer: Existing-building sewers may be used for effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers cannot be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner.

3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES

A. General: Locate field offices, storage facilities and other temporary construction and support facilities for each access and to avoid interference with construction operations and use of the site and building by Owner's employees and the public.

B. Field Office: Provide temporary office of sufficient size to accommodate activities on the Project site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings.

C. Storage and Fabrication Facilities: Provide storage and fabrication facilities, sized, furnished and equipped, as deemed necessary by the Contractor to accommodate materials and equipment involved.

1. Shed may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces.

2. Provide weatherproof coverage for outdoor storage of materials and equipment needing only limited protection.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor shall provide temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water for construction workers. Use of building toilet, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures will not be permitted.

1. Comply with regulations and health codes for the operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities for construction personnel.

2. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials for each construction facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.

3. When the premises are occupied, locate temporary facilities where directed by the Owner.

E. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary protection of construction in progress and completed, from damage by other construction operations and misuse. Provide temporary barricades and enclosures as necessary to protect workers and the public from the injury.





1. Provide temporary enclosures for weather protection, as necessary.

2. Adequately cover and protect completed work from traffic and subsequent construction operations.

3. Close opening through roof with load-bearing wood-framed construction or substantial barricades.

F. Temporary Signs: Prepare one (1) project identification sign, 5' x 8'; install sign in location and with graphic content as directed by the Architect. Support sign on 4" x 4" posts of preservative treated wood or galvanized steel imbedded 3'-0" deep in concrete. Bottom of sign to be approximately 4' off ground. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.

1. Project Identification Sign: Engage an experienced sign company to apply electronic graphics. Sign board shall be fully painted (one side) with primer and exterior enamel.

2. Temporary Sign: Contractor shall provide signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors, and as necessary for safety and to meet insurance requirements.

3. Verify layout of project identification sign with Architect.

G. Cleaning and Waste Disposal: Keep the construction areas, staging area, and surrounding areas free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.

1. Construction and Staging Areas: Comply with the following requirements in construction and staging areas.

a. Execute periodic cleaning to maintain premises free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish caused by Project construction operations.

b. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.

c. Provide adequate number of containers for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris.

d. Remove waste materials, rubbish, debris from the side and dispose of legally.

e. Handle hazardous, dangerous and unsanitary waste materials separately. Do not permit discharge of toxic, flammable and hazardous materials into the ground and into drains and sewers.

f. Control the wash-out and dumping of concrete truck, gypsum board finishing equipment, and similar operations involving cementitious materials to prevent creation of nuisance and clogging of drains.

g. Clean interior of Project work areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until Project is ready for acceptance or occupancy.

h. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.





2. Occupied Areas: When portions of the premises are occupied by the Owner, the Contractor shall keep such areas free from all dust and debris resulting from Contract operations (NO EXCEPTIONS). If any occupied area requires janitorial service at the beginning of any business day, a janitorial service will be called to expedite the clean-up and the Contractor will be back-charged. In such case an appropriate Change Order will be issued deducting the cost of the janitorial services from the Contractor's Contract amount.

3. If the Contractor fails to carry out cleaning work as specified, and fails within seven (7) days after notification by Architect to commence and continue with required cleaning procedures, the Owner may perform specified cleaning and deduct by appropriate Change Order the cost the cleaning from the Contract Amount. This right of the Owner, if exercised, shall be exercised without prejudice to any to her remedy the Owner may have under the Contract Documents or law.

H. Pest Control: Before finish work in construction area starts, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to perform extermination and control procedures so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations in a lawful manner using environmentally safe materials.

I. Construction Aids: Construct and maintain scaffolds, ramps, and ladders necessary for reaching all portions of the work conveniently and safely. Provide hoists, trash chutes, lifts, carts and other equipment necessary for handling materials and debris.

J. Staging Area: Refer to drawings for requirements, if the Contractor elects to use site area for construction purposes.

1. If used by the Contractor, the staging area shall be enclosed with a 6' high chain link fence with gates. Erect fence and gates in accordance with the standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute.

2. Promptly remove fence and gates at end of staging area usage. Patch postholes in pavement. Repair disturbed grass areas and re-sod. Clean area and repaint parking lines.

K. Dustproof Partitions: Provide and erect dustproof partitions with doors. Install gaskets between partition framing and in-place construction, and caulk perimeters to prevent dust infiltration. Tape plywood joints on non-public (construction) sided of partition; paint public (non-construction) side.

1. Where construction of framed plywood enclosure is impractical, provide equivalent protection by plastic sheeting taped in place and supported by wood framing as necessary to prevent sagging and displacement.

2. Maintain partitions in a substantial, dustproof condition throughout the construction period. Adjust or pre-place seals at doors as necessary.





3. Modify and relocate partitions during the construction period as necessary to permit construction operations to continue without disturbing banking operations.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES

A. Duration of Use: Throughout the construction period, until Substantial Completion.

B. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the security of temporary facilities, storage areas, equipment and other construction facilities.

C. Temporary Fire Protection: Provide and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonable predictable and controllable fire losses.

1. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires.

3. Provide supervision of welding operations and similar sources of fire ignition.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, and post graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. Furnish duplicate keys for all temporary locks to the Owner's designated representative.

F. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in compliance with environmental regulations. Minimize air contamination and pollution, and other undesirable effects. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons in adjacent in-use areas.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended used to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good condition until removal.





C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replace by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Permanent facilities may be used following removal of temporary facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner and Architect. Complete and, if necessary, restore permanent construction delayed because of interference by the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and equipment that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the Owner's premises after use.

2. At substantial completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period as specified in Section 017700.

3. Comply with additional requirements specified in Section 017700.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Source Limitation: To the greatest extent possible, for each unit of work provide products, materials and equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source.

1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

B. Whenever the name of particular brand, make or manufacturer is utilized, it is solely for the purpose of denoting quality standard of product desired.

1. The Bidder is not limited to the particular brand, make or manufacturer named.

2. Equivalent products will be acceptable, provided all other specified requirements are met.

C. Substitution prior approval is not required but recommended. If a potential supplier wishes to submit for prior approval a particular product other than a product specified in the Contract Documents, he shall do so no later than seven (7) working days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the Proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

1. If the Architect approves any prior proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum.

2. Contractor may not assume approval for use of any product not specified herein or officially listed as approved in an Addendum.





OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Maintain at the site for the Owner and Building Officials one record copy of:

1. Drawings (one complete set of stamped prints).

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda, change orders and other modifications to the contract.

4. Architect's field orders or written instructions.

5. Approved shop drawings, product data and samples.

6. Field test reports.

7. Construction photographs, if applicable.

1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.

1. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.

2. File samples in accordance with the numbering system used for specifications.

B. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

C. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect and Building Official.

1.3 MARKING DEVICES

A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letters.

B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.

1. Do not conceal any work until the required information is recorded.

2. Project record documents shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by Architect and Contractor prior to submission of each monthly request for partial payment.

C. Drawings: Legibly mark the drawings to record actual construction:

1. Indicate depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

2. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS



3. Indicate location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.

4. Indicate field changes of dimension and detail.

5. Indicate changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.

6. Indicate details not on original contract drawings.

D. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each section to record:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.

2. Changes made by field order or by change order.

1.4 REVIEWS AND SUBMITTALS

A. Architect and Contractor shall jointly review Project Record Documents for accuracy and completeness prior to submission of each monthly partial payment request.

B. Before final application for payment is submitted, deliver the completed project record documents to Architect upon completion and acceptance of the work and deliver one copy of the project record documents to the Building Department.

C. Accompany the submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate containing:

1. Date.

2. Project title and number.

3. Contractor's name and address.

4. Title and number of each Record Document.

5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.





OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA EXECUTION



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General Contract Provisions and Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.

1.2 WORK SUMMARY

A. This section pertains to the provision of all cutting, removing, replacing, patching, repairing, restoration, refinishing, and similar type work as necessary to existing work scheduled to remain and to new work required to be cut or uncovered. All existing facilities damages as a result of the construction activities shall be restored to a condition equivalent to that prior to the start of work, except where otherwise shown or specified.

B. The extent of Work includes uncovering work to provide for installation of ill-timed work, removal and replacement of defective work or work that does not conform to the Contract Documents; installation of new work to be installed in existing construction, and as necessary to make the various parts fit.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. Section 024119 – Selective Demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials for replacement, repairing, patching, restoration and similar type work shall conform to applicable Specification Sections for new materials or work. Where existing materials and/or installations are not covered by the Project Specifications, such materials shall match existing to the greatest extent possible. All excess materials resulting from cutting and removing work shall be removed from the premises in an approved manner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Inspect all existing conditions of work, for possible movement or damage during cutting or uncovering procedures. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products. Do not proceed with any further removal or patching or repairing work if unsatisfactory conditions or defects are observed; or if any unsafe conditions exist.





B. Submit a written request to Architect/Engineer well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects:

1. The work of the Owner or any separate Contractor. 2. The structural value or integrity of any element of the project. 3. The integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant

elements or systems. 4. The efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational

elements. 5. The visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 6. The request shall include:

a. Identification of the project. b. Description of the affected work. c. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation. d. The effect on the work of the Owner or any separate Contractor, or on the

structural or weatherproof integrity of the project. e. Description of the proposed work. f. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration or excavation. g. The Trades who will execute the work. h. The products proposed to be used. i. The extent of refinishing to be done. j. Alternatives to cutting and patching. k. Cost proposal, when applicable. l. Written permission of any separate Contractor whose work will be

affected.

C. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, Contractor shall submit a request for substitution as specified in the General Conditions.

D. Submit a written notice to Architect and Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered.

E. Preparation: Prior to cutting or uncovering work, provide all shoring, bracing, and supports as required to maintain the structural integrity of the Project. Prior to restoring work, properly prepare existing surfaces to receive new material such as to provide a proper bond or joining.

3.2 CUTTING AND DRILLING

A. Contractor shall do all cutting and drilling of existing walls, partitions, ceiling, floors, etc., as necessary for installation of the new work, including cutting of holes and other openings for new plumbing, mechanical, and electrical work. Cutting shall be performed by hand or small power tools; holes and slots cut neat and to size required, with minimum disturbance of adjacent existing work. Cut holes in existing concrete slabs for pipes and conduits with core drills of proper sizes. Openings shall be covered temporarily when not in use and patched as soon as work is installed.





3.3 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Existing work shall be cut, altered, removed, temporarily removed, and replaced, or relocated as required for the performance of the work indicated on the Drawings, work remaining in place damaged or defaced by reason of alteration or cutting shall be restored equal to its condition before any work under this Contract is begun. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all patching involving the various trades, whether or not specifically mentioned under the respective Sections. Coordinate all patching and repair work before beginning work.

B. Where alterations or removals expose damaged surfaces or materials caused by such alterations or removals, such surfaces or materials shall be refinished or replaced as necessary to make continuous areas uniform. Where new work by any trade occurs in an existing finished area the entire wall or ceiling surface in which such work occurs shall be refinished. Where such new work occurs in an existing unfinished area, the work shall be done to render the new work inconspicuous.

C. Alteration work will require repairing and rearrangement of existing work, such as piping, conduits, and their appurtenances. The materials and methods of application for new work for restoring or refinishing existing work shall comply with the applicable requirements of these specifications except that materials and workmanship not covered in the completed work, particularly on items exposed to view, shall conform to similar materials and workmanship existing in or adjacent to the space in which alterations are to be made.

D. Where utilities are removed, relocated, or abandoned, they shall be capped, valved, plugged or bypassed to make a complete and working installation as required. Resulting holes and damaged surfaces shall be properly patched to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces or prepared to receive new finishes as applicable.

E. Surfaces affected by patching and repairing work shall be restored to match existing adjacent surfaces. Repainting of affected areas or surfaces shall match color and shade or existing painted surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 RE-EXAMINATION AND COVERING UP OF WORK

A. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Architect, and if so ordered, such part of the work must be uncovered, by the Contractor involved. If such part of the work is found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such part of the work is found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor involved in the work shall pay such costs and also the cost of restoring the work of any other contractor damaged or removed. If any part of the work of the Contractor is covered up by the Contractor without approval or consent of the Architect, such work must, upon request of the Architect, be uncovered at the expense of the Contractor.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PREREQUISITIES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for certification of substantial completion (for either entire work or portions thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions in request:

1. In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100% completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete.

2. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents.

3. Submit statement showing accounting of changes to Contract Sum.

4. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

5. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents.

a. Submit roof warranty certifications.

6. Obtain and submit release enabling Owner's full and unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities, including (where required) occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

7. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage of settlement survey, property survey, and similar final record information as applicable.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner.

9. Make final changeover of locks and transmit keys to Owner, and advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

10. Complete startup testing of systems, and instructions of Owner's operating/maintenance personnel. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, mockups, and similar elements.

11. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touchup painting of marred surfaces.

12. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B. Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, Architect will either prepare certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate. Results of completed inspection will form initial "Punch list" for final acceptance.





1.2 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to requesting Architect's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any) in request:

1. Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and complete operations where required.

2. Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final) changes to Contract Sum.

3. Submit certified copy of Architect's final punch list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by Architect.

4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of time of substantial completion or when Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the work.

5. Submit consent of surety.

6. Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, acceptable to Owner.

7. Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

B. Re-inspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch list items resulting from earlier inspections, and except incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Architect will re-inspect the work. Upon completion of re-inspection, Architect will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to Architect for Owner's records.

B. Maintenance Manuals: Organize maintenance and operating manual information into suitable sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed (thumb tabbed). Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turnaround" cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product data, and similar applicable information. Bind each manual of each set in a heavy duty 2", 3-ring vinyl covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on both front and spine of each binder.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance or operation, to meet with Owner's personnel at project site, to provide basic instructions needed for proper operation and maintenance of entire work. Include instructions by manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in the required procedures.

1. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For operational equipment, demonstrate startup, shutdown, emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, energy effectiveness, and operations in relation with applicable warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing commitment.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first class building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required.

1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced finishes, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.

4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator equipment and similar equipment; remove excess lubrication and other substances.

5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces.

6. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean.

7. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.





8. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure.

9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.

10. Clean project site (yard and grounds), including landscape development areas, of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom clean condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even textured surface.

B. Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection of project, and to rid project of rodents, insects, and other pests.

C. Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during the course of the work to protect previously completed work during remainder of construction period.

D. Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn waste materials at site, or bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property, or discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems; remove waste materials from site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become Owner's property, dispose of these to Owner's best advantage as directed.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SELECTIVE DEMOLITION



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of selective demolition work is indicated on drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to commencement of work. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.

B. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure un-interrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.

C. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building, with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition, and with Owner's reduced usage during summer months.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations.

B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished.

C. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.

D. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

E. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.





F. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.

G. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building.

H. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities or work to remain.

J. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations.

K. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.

L. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required.

M. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation of new construction to insure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.

N. Remove protections at completion of work.

O. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner.

P. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

Q. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

R. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.

S. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations.





T. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.

U. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

V. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions to structure surfaces, equipment or to surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Owner's Representative prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

B. Cease operations and notify the Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations.

C. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.

D. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures as required preventing spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building.

E. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4" studs, 5/8" drywall (joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2" fire retardant plywood on demolition side, and fill partition cavity with sound deadening insulation.

F. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.





G. Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.

H. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.

B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power driven impact tools.

C. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.

D. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6" diameter, roots or other organic matter.

F. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict.

G. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay.

3.4 SALVAGE MATERIALS

A. Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage Deliver to Owner” carefully remove indicated items, clean, store and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt.

B. Historic artifacts, including cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other articles of historic significance remain the property of the Owner. Notify Owner's Representative if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal and salvage for Owner.





3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.

B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.

C. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.

3.6 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.

B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA CONCRETE WORK



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Form work for cast-in-place concrete foundations and floor slabs complete with shelving, bracing, anchorage and accessories.

B. Form openings for mechanical and electrical work.

C. Reinforcing steel and miscellaneous accessories required for cast-in-place concrete foundation and slabs.

1. Comply with Structural Engineer's design requirements.

D. Cast-in-place concrete foundations and slabs including vapor barrier.

E. Coordinate installation of items supplied by other sections of work.


A. Requirements, abbreviations and acronyms for reference standards are defined in Section 014200.

B. Codes and Standards. Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.

1. ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"

2. ACI 318 - "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard Practice"

4. ACI 315 - 80 - "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement"

5. ACI 315R - 80 - "Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures"

6. ACI 347 - 78 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork"

7. ASTM A185-79 - "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement"

8. ASTM A615 - 82 - "Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement”

9. ASTM C33 - 82 - "Concrete Aggregates"

10. ASTM C143-78 - "Slump of Portland Cement Concrete"

11. ASTM C150-91 - "Portland Cement"

12. ASTM C494-80 - "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete"

13. ASTM C309-81 - "Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete"

C. Construct and erect form work in accordance with ACI 318 and 347 and applicable construction safety regulations for place of work.





D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the structural adequacy of the forms, ties, shoving and bracing. Any requirements given herein are minimum for appearance purposes only, not to be considered as structural design.

1.3 MILL CERTIFICATES

A. Before starting concrete work, submit signed certificate to the Architect for the following: Mill certificates from suppliers that reinforcing steel conforms to structural engineer's design requirements and these specifications.

1.4 CONCRETE TESTING

A. Required in accordance with Section 014000 - Quality Control.

B. The Owner will appoint a testing laboratory and shall pay all fees associated with concrete testing. The Contractor shall assist the Owner's representative in securing test samples.

1. Should additional testing analysis, and/or corrective actions be required due to the concrete failing to meet specified strengths, then all such costs associated with this additional work shall be paid for by the Contractor.

2. Three cylinders shall be molded from each sample. Cylinders shall be made in accordance with ASTM C192. Samples shall be taken for each individual area poured that day, such as footings, structural beams and slabs.

C. Compressive tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C39. Tests will be made at 7 and 28 days from time of molding. When a satisfactory relationship between 7-day and 28-day test exists, results may be used as an indicator of the 28-day strength.

D. If test results of any concrete to be used in the project show that the concrete strength is below the specified limit and does not meet other requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments, as directed by the Architect, at the Contractor's expense. The removal and replacement method or methods shall be subject to approval of the Architect.

1.5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

A. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and other embedded items required for adjoining work shall be placed prior to pouring concrete. All subcontractor's whose work is related to the concrete or which must be supported by it, shall be given ample notice and opportunity to introduce or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed. All ferrous metal sleeves, inserts, anchors and other embedded items exposed to the weather or where rust would impair the appearance or finish shall be galvanized.





B. The material, design and location of waterstops in construction joints and expansion joints shall be indicated or as specified herein. Each piece of pre-molded waterstop to be of maximum practicable length in order that the number of end joints will be a minimum. Joints at intersections and at ends of pieces shall be made in the manner most appropriate to the material being used. Joints shall develop effective watertightness fully equal to that of the continuous waterstop material.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming materials, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect.

B. Shop drawings - Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures.

C. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise requested by Architect including names, sources and descriptions.

D. Material Certificates: Provide material certificates for concrete. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements.

E. Shop drawings and design calculations for shoring systems are required.

F. Indicate pertinent dimensions, methods of construction, materials, arrangement of joints, ties and shores, location of bracing and temporary supports, schedule of erection and stripping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or reflection.





B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A82 plain, cold-drawn, steel.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric.

D. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, unless otherwise acceptable.

E. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

F. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of support are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI Class 2).

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

1. Use 1 brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C or Type F.

1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 15% of cement content by weight.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Do not use fine or course aggregates containing spalling causing deleterious substances.

2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect.

D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C330.





E. Water: Potable.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, and contain no more than 0.1% chloride ions.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. "Eucon WR-75"; Euclid Chemical Co.

b. "Pozzolith 334"; Master Builders.

c. "Plastocrete 160"; Sika Chemical Corp.

d. "Chemtard"; Chem-Masters Corp.

H. High Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or Type G and contain no more than 0.1% chloride ions.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Water Reducing Non-Chloride Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E, and containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.

a. "WRDA 19"; W.R. Grace.

b. "PSP"; Protex Industries Inc.

c. "Super P"; Anti-Hydro.

d. "Silkament; Sika Chemical Corp.

e. "Mighty 150"; ICI Americas Corp.

f. "Eucon 37"; Euclid Chemical Co.

g. "PSI Super'; Gifford-Hill.

h. "Pozzolith 400"; Master Builders.

I. Water Reducing Non-Chloride Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E, and containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.


a. "Accelguarde 80"; Eulicid Chemical Co.

b. "Pozzolith 500"; Master Builders.

J. Water-Reducing Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D, and contain no more than 0.1% chloride ions.






a. "Edoco 20006"; Edoco Technical Products.

b. "Pozzolith 300-R"; Master Builders.

c. "Eucon Retarder 75"; Euclid Chemical Co.

d. "Daratard"; W.R.Grace.

e. "Plastiment"; Sika Chemical Co.

K. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. Admixtures containing any chloride ions shall not be used for concrete supported by metal deck.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Rubber Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:

a. The Burke Co.

b. Progress Unlimited.

c. Williams Products.

d. Edoco Technical Products.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:

a. AFCO Products.

b. The Burke Co.

c. Edoco Technical Products.

d. Greenstreet Plastic Products.

e. Harbour Town Products.

f. W.R. Meadows.

g. Progress Unlimited.

h. Schleigel Corp.

i. Vinylex Corp.

C. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where indicated. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E154, as follows:

1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick.





D. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Non-metallic.

b. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.

c. "Sonogrout";Sonneborn-Contech.

d. "Euco-N"; Eulicid Chemical Co.

e. "Crystex"; L & M Const. Chemical Co.

f. "Sure-Grip Grout"; Dayton Superior Corp.

g. "Horngrout"; A.C. Horn.

h. "Supreme"; Gifford-Hill.

E. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from Jute or Kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

F. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171.

1. Waterproof paper.

2. Polyethylene film.

3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

G. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type 1, Class a unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied to 200 sq. ft./gal.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to, the following:

a. "Masterseal"; Master Builders.

b. "A-H 3 Way" Sealer"; Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co.

c. "Clear Seal"; W.R. Grace.

d. "J-20 Acrylic Cure"; Dayton Superior.

e. "Sure Cure"; Kaufman Products Inc.

f. "Spartan-Cote"; The Burke Co.

g. "Sealkure"; Toch Div. - Carboline.

h. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech.

i. "Polyclear"; Upco Chemical/USM Corp.

j. "L&M Cure"; L & M Construction Chemicals.

k. "Klearseal"; Setcon Industries.

l. "LR-151"; Protex Industries.

m. "Hardtop"; Gifford-Hill.





H. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type.


a. "Epoxtite"; A.C. Horn.

b. "Edoco 2118 Epoxy Adhesive"; Edoco Technical Prod.

c. "Sikadur Hi-Mod"; Sika Chemical Corp.

d. "Euco Epoxy 463 or 615"; Euclid Chemical Co.

e. "Patch and Bond Epoxy"; The Burke Co.

f. "Sure-Poxy"; Kaufman Products Inc.

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Prepare and design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties:

1. 4000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.35 maximum (air-entrained) (for building slabs and beams).

2. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.50 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.44 maximum (air-entrained) (for building slab).

D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work.

E. Admixtures:

1. Use water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus-or-minus 1-1/2% within following limits:





a. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or subjected to hydraulic pressure:

1) 4.5% (moderate exposure); 5.5% (severe exposure) 1/12" max. aggregate.

2) 4.5% (moderate exposure); 6.0% (severe exposure) 1" max. aggregate.

3) 5.0% (moderate exposure); 6.0% (severe exposure) 3/4" max. aggregate.

4) 5.5% (moderate exposure): 7.0% (severe exposure) 1/2" max. aggregate.

5) Other Concrete: 2% to 4% air.

3. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with manufacturer's direction.

F. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for the following conditions with maximum water-cement (WC) ratios as follows: Subjected to freezing and thawing; WC 0.50.

A. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3".

2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3".

3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2R-3-slump concrete.

4. Other concrete: Not more than 4".

2.2 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd., or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd., or fraction thereof.

1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity and amount of water introduced.

B. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified.

1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 may be required.





2. When air temperature is between 85°F (30°C) and 90°F (32°C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90°F (32°C) reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

A. Design, erect support brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removal or snap off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is 1" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface.

G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and





securely support items built into forms.

H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement is required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

B. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.

C. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least two full meshes and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. At areas other than slab on grade, provide mesh in flat sheets.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Control joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Place control joints in concrete slabs-on-grade where shown or indicated on drawings. Construction joints shall be tongue and groove made using preformed galvanized steel metal edge forms with a minimum depth of at least the depth of concrete slab at joint location. Floor slabs-on-grade shall be poured in a checkerboard pattern in areas not exceeding 500 square feet. Contractor is to provide plan of pour locations and pattern to architect for approval prior to commencing concrete placement. In event that control joints are not shown on drawings, contractor shall provide his proposed layout of control joints to architect for approval. The maximum spacing of joints will not exceed 25' in any direction.

B. Form contraction joints by inserting pre-molded plastic, hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.





1. Contraction joints may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.

C. Joint sealant material is specified in Division-7 sections of these specifications.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.

B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.

3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. Clean re-used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition.

B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a foam-coating compound before reinforcement is placed.

C. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Coat steel forms with a non-staining rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used.

B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

C. General: Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete", and as herein specified.





D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.

E. Placing Concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

F. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.

G. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine.

H. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into proceeding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

I. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

J. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

K. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

L. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.

M. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduce strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified.

N. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F (4°C) uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50°F (10°C) and not more than 80°F (27°C) at point of placement.

O. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.





P. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

Q. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.

R. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90°F (32°C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

S. Cool steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed.

T. Use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions.

3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched with fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.

3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finished as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane so that depressions between high





spots do not exceed 5/16" under a 10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thin film finish coating system.

C. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed 5/16" under a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or, hot temperatures.

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

2. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at each end of final curing period.

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.

C. Provide moisture curing by following methods.

D. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.





F. Provide curing and sealing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows:

1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.

2. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down carpet) painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

3. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surface, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

4. Curing Uniformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing method.

5. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture retaining cover unless otherwise directed.

G. Sealer and Dustproofer: Apply a second coat of specified curing and sealing compound only to surfaces given a first coat.

3.10 SHORES AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as herein specified.

3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50°F (10°C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

3.12 RE-USE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork.





B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-shrink grout. Use non-metallic grout.

E. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads and landings and associated items. Cast-in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp, and finish concrete surfaces as scheduled.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried.

B. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.





C. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

D. Repair concealed formed surfaces where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.

E. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness using a template having required a slope.

F. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions.

G. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

H. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete.

I. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

J. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

K. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes to sound concrete and clean of dust din and loose panicles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one pan Portland cement to 2-1/2 pans fine aggregate passing a No.16 mesh sieve using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has





dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

L. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.

M. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.

3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by Architect.

B. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94.

C. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

D. Air Content: ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air entrained concrete.

E. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40°F (4°C) and below, and when 80°F (2°C) and above; and each time a set of compression tests specimens made.

F. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of 3 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

G. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. over and above the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, one specimen tested at 28 days and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

H. When frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.

I. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. strength test may be waived by Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.





J. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified comprehensive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified comprehensive by more than 500 PSI.

L. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours that tests are made. Reports of comprehensive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

M. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

N. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA STAMPED CONCRETE OVERLAY



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Stamped concrete overlay where indicated on drawings.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 033100 – Concrete Work

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 013300 – Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including surface preparation and application instructions.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of standard colors.

D. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.

E. Applicator’s Project References: Submit applicator’s list of successfully completed stamped concrete overlay projects, including project name and location, name of Architect, and type and quantity of materials applied.


A. Applicator’s Qualifications:

1. Applicator regularly engaged, for preceding 5 years, in application of stamped concrete overlay of similar type to that specified.

2. Employ persons trained for application of stamped concrete overlay.

B. Mockups:

1. Construct Mockups of stamped concrete overlay:

a. Use same materials and methods for use in the Work.

b. Location: Determined by Architect.

c. Minimum Size: 4’ x 4’. 2. Receive approval of mockups by Architect for patterns, colors, textures,

finishing, sealing, special effects, and workmanship before application of stamped concrete overlay.

3. Approved Mockups:

a. Standard for patterns, colors, textures, finishing, sealing, special effects, and workmanship of stamped concrete overlay.

b. Retain through completion of Work for use as quality standard.





1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and

packaging until application.

3. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors.

4. Store materials out of direct sunlight.

5. Keep materials from freezing.

6. Protect materials during storage, handling, and application to prevent contamination or damage.

1.6 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Apply materials when air and surface temperatures are between 55˚F and 80˚F.

B. Do not apply materials when rain, snow, or excessive moisture is expected during application of within 24 hours after application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED INSTALLER

A. Creative Concrete by Ron (337) 855-8333 or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Overlay: Stampable Overlay.

B. Reactive Primer.

C. Overlay Liquid Colorant.

1. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

D. Colorless Bond Breaker.

E. Stamping Mats.

1. Pattern: As selected from manufacturer’s available patterns.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing concrete surfaces to receive stamped concrete overlay.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect application or subsequent use.

C. Do not being preparation or application until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect adjacent surfaces, areas, adjoining walls, and landscaping from contact with stamped concrete overlay materials.

B. Surface Preparation of Existing Concrete.

1. Prepare existing concrete in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Profile concrete to surface profile in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

3. Ensure existing concrete is clean, sound, dry, and fully cured.

4. Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, sealers, paint, coatings, and other contaminates that could reduce bond with overlay.

5. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete.

6. Fill cracks, holes, spalls, and low areas.

7. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply stamped concrete overlay materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Apply reactive primer to prepared concrete surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Mixing: Mix concrete overlay material with water and overlay liquid colorant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Overlay Thickness: Apply concrete overlay over reactive primer to uniform thickness, 1/4" thick minimum.





E. Colorless Bond Breaker.

1. Apply colorless bond breaker in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to bottom of stamping mats and on concrete overlay surface, when concrete overlay has reached plastic stage desirable for imprinting.

2. Do not trowel or mix colorless bond breaker into plastic concrete overlay surface.

F. Stamping Mats.

1. Press stamping mats in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions into concrete overlay that has reached plastic stage desirable for imprinting.

2. Use stamping mats to create patterns in concrete overlay as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Approved Mockups: Match approved mockups for patterns, colors, textures, finishing, sealing, special effects, and workmanship.

3.4 SEALING

A. Seal concrete overlay surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Apply sealer to clean and dry concrete overlay surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions after concrete overlay has cured 24 to 48 hours.

C. Apply sealer uniformly over entire stamped concrete overlay surface.

D. Do not allow traffic on finished sealed surfaces for the following periods after application:

1. Foot Traffic: Minimum 36 hours.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Exterior Surfaces: Protect applied stamped concrete overlay to ensure that, except for normal weathering, concrete overlay will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA MORTAR



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry Work specified in Section 042000.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS


B. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement

C. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

D. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

E. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

F. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry

G. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete

H. ASTM C476 - Grout for Reinforced and Non-Reinforced Masonry

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 013300.

B. Include design mix, environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with general conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. (Type III may be used for cold weather laying.)

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type II

C. Sand: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean natural sand; dry; protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter; well graded from coarse to fine; containing 5 to 15% of fines.





D. Portland Cement Grout Aggregate:

1. ASTM C33

2. Coarse Aggregate: Pea gravel uniformly graded from 3/8" to 1/2".

E. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, Hydrated or quick lime, slaked to form lime putty conforming to ASTM C5.

F. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious material.

G. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted.

2.2 MIXES

A. Mortar for exterior work: ASTM C270, Type S.

B. Mortar for interior work: ASTM C270, Type N.

C. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, 750 psi at 28 days with maximum 2% ammonium sterate or calcium sterate per cement weight.

D. Mortar for masonry below grade and/or in contact with earth: ASTM C270, Type M.

E. Mortar shall be pre-mixed by manufacturer and shall be complete except for sand and water. Job mixing of mortar shall not be allowed.

F. Mortar color: Standard gray.

2.3 GROUT FILL

A. For Lintels: Transit or job mixed, to produce minimum 2,500 psi strength at 28 days, 7-8 inches slump.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Use approved measuring box method.

1. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of materials exclusively by shovel will not be permitted.

2. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer.





3. Place two thirds of the required mixing water and one-half of the sand in the mixer. Next, add the masonry cement. Then add the remaining sand. Allow to mix for two minutes to permit the fluidizing effect of the air entraining agent to become effective. Then add remaining water to obtain the desired flow.

4. At no time should the amount of material in the mixer cover the top two inches of the mixer blades when they are at the apex of their travel.

5. Mix mortars with the minimum amount of water, consistent with workability, to provide maximum tensile strength within the capacity of the mortar.

B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout.

3.2 RETEMPERING

A. To minimize re-tempering, do not mix mortar more than 15 minutes prior to use.

B. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper within one hour of mixing. Do not use or re-temper mortar more than one hour after mixing. Do not use mortar which has begun to set.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 042000 - Unit Masonry.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA UNIT MASONRY



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary, and perform all operations in connection with unit masonry work, complete, and in accordance with the drawings and as herein specified. Masonry work includes:

1. Brick veneer with wood stud backup.


A. Section 040000 - Mortar.

B. Section 042113 - Brick Masonry.

C. Section 071750 - Masonry Water Repellent.


A. Comply with applicable requirements of governing codes and regulations for types of masonry construction indicated.

B. Review installation procedures and coordinate with other work that must be integrated with masonry.

C. Masonry materials shall conform to all applicable codes and regulations. All workmen shall be thoroughly familiar with the materials and methods specified and the design requirements of the Work.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb:

1. For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10' or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more.

2. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more.

3. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10', 1/2" maximum.

B. Variation from Level:

1. For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more.

2. For top surfaces of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit.





C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40'.

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2".

E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness:

1. Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than ± 1/8" with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2".

2. Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than ± 1/8".

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, mortar, accessory, and other manufactured products. Submit certifications that each item complies with specified requirements, and with all applicable codes and regulations. Include instruction for handling, storage, installations, and protection of each.

B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bendings and placement of reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures".

1. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcing for unit masonry work.

C. For initial selection and verification purposes of color and textures, submit facing brick samples showing full range of colors and textures available in products complying with specified requirements. Furnish samples made up of actual bricks or sections of brick.

1. Following preliminary selection of color and textures, submit samples consisting of 5 individual bricks for each color and texture under consideration. Include in each set the maximum variation to be expected in finished work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to job site in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle masonry material in a manner to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperatures, contaminates, corrosion or other causes. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in a dry location. Store aggregates in locations where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or corrosion.





1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow, or ground water from soilage or inter-mixture with earth or other materials.

B. Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coating, including ice, which will reduce or destroy bond.

C. During erection, cover top of wall with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 2' down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns.

E. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

F. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.

G. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.

H. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread out on the ground and extending not less than 3' from wall surface and 2' up wall.

I. Cold Weather Protection

1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch.

2. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions.

3. Perform the following construction procedures while masonry work is progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperature. In heating mortar and grout materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10˚F.

a. When air temperature is from 40˚F to 20˚F, heat mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40˚F and 120˚F. For grout follow normal masonry procedures.

b. When air temperature is from 32˚F to 25˚F, heat sand and water to produce mortar temperatures between 40˚F and 120˚F. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. For grout, heat materials to 90˚F to produce in place grout temperature of 70˚F at end of workday.





c. When air temperature is from 25˚F to 20˚F, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40˚F and 120˚F. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Use heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. Use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 15 miles per hour. For grout, heat materials to 90˚F to produce in a place grout temperature of 70˚F at end of workday.

d. When air temperature is 20˚F and below, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40˚F and 120˚F. Maintain air temperature above 32˚F. Do not lay units which have a surface temperature of 20˚F. For grout, heat materials to 90˚F to produce in a place grout temperature of 70˚F at end of workday.

e. If required, heat and dry masonry units so that they are above 20˚F at time of lying.

f. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of at least 40˚F.

g. Do not heat water for mortar and grout to above 160˚. 4. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the

following manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures.

a. When mean daily air temperature is from 40˚F to 32˚F, protect masonry form rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.

b. When mean daily air temperature is from 32˚F to 20˚F, completely cover masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48 hours for grouted masonry.

c. When mean daily temperature is 20˚F and below, maintain masonry temperature above 32˚F for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other acceptable methods proven to be satisfactory. For grouted masonry maintain heated enclosure to 40˚F for 48 hours.

J. The contractor shall assume responsibility for providing adequate bracing of walls during erection to prevent damage due to high winds or other lateral loads and construction impacts until permanent bracing is installed. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for damage due to his failure to take such precautions.

K. Protect all masonry units and the installed work of other trades. Repair or replace any damaged work at no additional cost to the Owner.

L. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry that is specified to be wetted, comply with BIA recommendations. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.

B. See other applicable sections of Division 4 for required masonry materials and methods.

C. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be furnished, and shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

2.2 STEEL LINTELS AND REINFORCING

A. Steel lintels: A-36 steel, sized as shown on drawings. Before delivering to job site, clean lintels thoroughly and coat with rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Steel anchors: A-36 steel, galvanized, minimum 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2' - 0" long, with ends turned up 2", or with cross-pins.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which unit masonry work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Architect's approval of sheathing and/or dampproofing is required prior to lying of brick veneer masonry.

3.2 SAMPLE PANEL

A. Lay-up a 3'-0" high by 4'- 0" wide sample panel to illustrate the typical joint and pattern layout. Refer to Drawings for location.

3.3 WETTING OF MASONRY UNITS

A. Wet brick and other solid masonry units made from clay or shale which have ASTM C67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 square inches per minute. Use wetting methods that ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid.

1. For units with surface temperatures above 32˚F, wet with water heated to above 70˚F.





2. For units with surface temperature below 32˚F, wet with water heated to above 130˚F.

B. Use wetting methods which ensure that each masonry unit is nearly saturated but surface dry when laid.

C. Except for absorbent units specified to be wetted, lay masonry units surface dry.

D. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing.

3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 8" masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chase recesses.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening.

D. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full-size units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut C.M.U.'s.

3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and wherever possible at other locations.

B. Lay-up walls plumb and true to comply with specified tolerances with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.

C. Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a Wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each Wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work where indicated.





D. Unless otherwise indicated, use mortar as specified in Section 041000 - Mortar, and as follows:

1. Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth, interior and exterior loadbearing partitions.

2. Use Type S mortar for exterior or above grade loadbearing and non-loadbearing walls, parapet walls, pavements, and for interior loadbearing walls and non-loadbearing walls.

3. Use Type N mortar for pointing.

3.6 BATCH CONTROL

A. Comply with requirements of Section 041000 - Mortar.

3.7 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay brick and other solid masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove units into place. Do not slush head joints.

B. Maintain joint widths shown except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints.

C. Cut joint flush for masonry walls that are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials unless otherwise indicated.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave unless otherwise indicated.

E. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. Leave expansion joints free of mortar and fill only with compressible backer rod in preparation for application of sealant.

F. Remove masonry units disturbed after lying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units that have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.

G. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings during construction. Strike joints facing cavity flush.

H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.





3.8 BUILT-IN ITEMS

A. Carefully examine the Drawings and other sections of the Specifications and build in all access panels, nailing blocks, anchor bolts, etc., and cooperate with all other trades in the installation of their work, such as electrical conduit, outlet boxes, cabinets, pipe, flashing inserts and any other items required for the completed work.

B. As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

C. Provide 6" x 4" western red cedar lintels above all doors and windows to match existing. 4" minimum beam each side.

D. Masonry shall extend as far as possible into hollow frames. Fill voids between frames and masonry in both interior and exterior frames solidly with mortar. Embed frame anchors securely in mortar joints.

E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work.

3.9 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MASONRY

A. Tie exterior Wythe to studwall back-up with individual brick veneer anchor metal ties spaced not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 24" o.c. horizontally. Stagger in alternate courses.

B. Coordinate masonry work with installation of other work.

3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build-in related items as the masonry work progresses.

1. Provide items specified under other Division 4 sections.

2. Build flanges of expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.

B. Leave expansion joints free of mortar. Insert compressible joint filler and apply sealant per manufacturer's recommendations.





C. Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, locate control joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work including the following:

1. Where masonry abuts supporting structure.

2. At a distance equal to 1/2 the wall height from corners of intersections with other masonry.

3. Place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 50' o.c. for reinforced clay masonry, or 35' o.c. for reinforced concrete masonry Wythes, or 30' o.c. if not reinforced.

3.11 FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK

A. Build-in provide for all flashing required for a completely watertight building.

B. Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at, or above, all shelf angles, lintels, and other obstructions to the downward exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar.

C. Install membrane flashing occurring with masonry where shown on Drawings. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line 1/2" in form exterior face of outer Wythe of masonry, through the outer Wythe, turned up a minimum of 4" and through the inner Wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of inner wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner Wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner Wythe and turn up approximately 2". At heads and sills turn up ends not less than 2" to form a pan.

E. Install flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Provide weeps in the head joints of the first course of masonry immediately above concealed flashings. Space 24" o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate all mortar at head joints at weep location.

G. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work.

3.12 REPAIR AND POINTING

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.





B. During the tooling of joints, remove excess fins of mortar, enlarge any voids or holes, (except weep holes) and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Wipe off excess mortar as the work progresses. Dry brush at the end of each day's work.

B. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean 1/2 of sample wall panel as follows. Obtain Architect's acceptance of sample cleaning before proceeding to clean masonry work.

1. Dry clean to remove large particles of mortar using wood paddles and scrapers. Use chisel or wire brush if required.

2. Presoak wall by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt.

3. Scrub down wall with stiff fiber brush and a solution of 1/2 cup of trisodium phosphate and 1/2 cup of household detergent dissolved in one-gallon water.

4. Rinse walls, using clean, pressurized water, to neutralize cleaning solution and remove loose material.

C. If cleaning of sample wall panel area by non-acid method is unacceptable, clean as follows:

1. Dry clean and presoak as specified for non-acid cleaning.

2. Comply with the recommendations for Cleaning Brick Masonry of the Technical Notes Number 20 by Brick Institute of America (BIA) and with the recommendations for the Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).

3. Apply proprietary acid-type cleaners in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Do not acid clean concrete unit masonry unless otherwise indicated.

5. Protect other work from acid solutions and cleaning operations.

3.14 COMPLETION OF MASONRY WORK

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.

B. Unless otherwise instructed, remove excess masonry materials from site. Remove mortar droppings, broken units, and other debris. Remove all tools and equipment.





C. Normal weathering of masonry work, exposed to the weather after completion, will be acceptable, provided other conditions and activities do not interfere and result in an unacceptable condition.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA VENEER MASONRY



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnishing of face brick and related accessories.


A. Section 040000 - Mortar

B. Installation is a part of Section 042000 - Unit Masonry

C. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants


A. Perform brick masonry work in accordance with requirements of ANSI A41.1, unless indicated otherwise herein.



B. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick

C. ASTM C62 - Building Brick

D. ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick

E. ANSI A41.1 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50ºF prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. During freezing or near freezing weather, provide adequate equipment and/or cover to maintain minimum temperature of 50ºF and to protect masonry work completed or in progress.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval one 12" x 12" sample panel showing brick and color of mortar to match existing brickwork.





1.7 PROTECTION

A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY

A. Exterior Face Brick: Grade MW (with standard core holes), Type FBX in accordance with ASTM C216.

B. Common Brick: Grade MW, in accordance with ASTM C62.

C. Face brick to be rated at not more than slightly effloresced when tested in accordance with ASTM C-67.

D. Size/Texture/Manufacturer: Match existing (Bayou Blend by Acme Brick).

E. Provide medium to light sacking (match existing).

2.2 VENEER TIES, NAIL-ON TYPE

A. Corrugated wall ties, 7/8" wide x 22 ga. (.0229").

B. Finish: Hot dipped galvanized after Fabrication.

C. Manufacturers/Products:

1. AA Wire Products, Chicago, Ill., "No. AA311, 22 ga."

2. Heckman Building Products, Chicago, Ill., "Corrugated Tie #260, 22 ga."

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Membrane Flashing

1. Type: Nonreinforced, homogenous plastic flashing material.

2. Weight: 22 oz. per sq. yd.

3. Manufacturers/Products:

a. B.F. Goodrich Co.,

b. Wasco Products, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.

B. Control Joints

1. Exterior quality sealant and backer rod in accordance with section 079200 - Joint Sealants.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Supply metal anchors to proper trade for placement. Provide sufficient quantity and direct their correct placement.

B. Ensure items built-in by the trades for this work are properly located and sized.

C. Establish lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION

A. Architect's approval of sheathing and/or dampproofing is required prior to laying of brick veneer masonry.

B. Installation is a part of Section 042000 - Unit Masonry.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WOODFRAME CONSTRUCTION



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Exterior partition framing with sheathing

B. Interior partition framing

C. Ceiling framing at furr downs

D. Roof framing with trusses and sheathing

E. Miscellaneous blocking

F. Air infiltration barrier.

1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. Glued laminated timbers are a part of section 061700.


A. Provide lumber complying with Product Standard PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard". Nominal sizes are indicated. Provide actual sizes complying with minimum size requirements of PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use.

1. Lumber shall have visible stamp of an agency certified by NFPA.

2. Lumber and timber shall be sound, thoroughly seasoned and well manufactured. Materials that cannot be corrected by bridging and nailing shall be free from warp.

B. Provide plywood complying with Product Standard PS 1 "Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial".

C. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Identify preservative properties, method of treatment, expected service life.

1. Submit in accordance with Section 013300.

B. Submit manufacturer specifications and installation instructions for materials listed below:

1. Trussed rafters





C. Where dimension lumber is provided to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in the form of a signed copy of applicable portion of the lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected specie and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.

D. Submit shop Drawings of wood trusses. Indicate species and stress grades of lumber used and details of metal connectors to be used at joints. Show pitch, span and location of trusses. Provide large-scale detail of typical connections and anchorages.

1. Provide truss manufacturer's design and engineering data for required trusses including stress diagrams and name seal or registered number and state of registry of a licensed professional or structural engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee.

B. Dress dimension lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide seasoned dimension lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with dry size requirements of PS 20. Mark lumber "S-Dry".

D. For framing lumber from 2" through 4" thick and 4" wide, provide "Construction" grade light framing and mark "CONST".

E. For framing lumber 6" and wider, and from 2" through 4" thick provide structural framing lumber of specie and grade scheduled for each use.

F. Lumber to have visible grade stamp of an agency certified by NFPA.

G. Lumber and timber shall be sound, thoroughly seasoned and well manufactured. Materials that cannot be correct by bridging and nailing shall be free from warp.

2.2 DECAY AND INSECT RESISTANT LUMBER

A. Type: No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine pressure treated lumber treated in accordance with American Wood Preservers Association Standards C1-68, C2-68, and C7-69, protected against decay producing fungi and insects.

1. Each piece of lumber must be stamped for identification and a certificate provided prior to installation verifying compliance with above standards.





2. Lumber in contact with soil, concrete, masonry, and lumber for exterior construction and embedded in roofing shall be decay and insect resistant lumber.

B. Acceptable Products/Manufacturers:

1. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Thomson, GA., "Dixie CCA."

2. Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA, "Wolmanized".

2.3 PLYWOOD

A. Roof Sheathing: Douglas fir plywood, exterior sheathing grade, C-D Veneer.

2.4 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER

A. Polyethylene film, in continuous rolls 9' wide x 195' long.

B. Manufacturers/Products

1. DuPont Company, Wilmington, DE, "Tyvek Housewrap."

2. Raven Industries, Sioux Falls, SD, "Rufco-Wrap."

3. Simplex Products, Adrian, MI, "Barricade Building Wrap."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set wood framing accurately to required lines and levels. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacing shown. Frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with the recommendations of the "Manual for House Framing" of the National Forest Products Association. Cut, join, and tightly fit framing around other work. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise detailed.

1. Anchor and nail to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule of the "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of NFPA.

3.2 STUD FRAMING

A. General: Provide stud framing where shown. Erect on lines shown, to true planes, plumb, level, and rigidly secured. Unless otherwise shown, use 2" x 4" wood studs spaced 16" o.c. and placed with wide face at right angles to direction of wall or partition.

B. Plates: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates, 2" thick and of same width as studs. Nail bottom plates to wood construction. If bottom plate bears on concrete, fasten with anchor bolts, expansion sleeves and lag bolts, or use power driven studs. Provide fasteners near each end of partition or wall and at not more





than 4' o.c. between ends. Overlap top plates at corners and intersections.

1. Bottom plate shall be pressure treated where in contact with concrete. Comply with requirements of Part 2.

2. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on ends of treated wood sawn at job sites. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Top plates shall be considered as firestopping and all penetrations sealed as required.

C. Construct corners and intersections of partitions and walls with not less than 3 studs 2" thick to provide bearing surface for wall finishes.

1. Brace exterior corners with vertical sheet of 4' x 8' x 1/2" plywood in both directions. Cover plywood with felt per part 2, and lap to shed water.

D. Secure ends of partitions abutting masonry or concrete with 1/2" diameter expansion bolts or power driven studs located near each end and at not more than 4' o.c. between ends.

E. Provide firestopping in continuous horizontal row at mid-height of single story partitions over 8' high or as indicated, and at midpoint between floors of multi-story partitions using 2" thick members of same width as studs.

1. Provide blocking and framing of same width as studs as shown and required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim.

2. Fill edge joints and sand thoroughly.

3. Protect subfloor from damage. Fill any dents, etc. and sand thoroughly.

F. Frame openings with double studs (triple for opening wider than 6') and headers of single or double members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. Provide headers of depths indicated.

G. Frame gable end walls as shown. Cut studs to fit and toe nail to top plates of wall framing. If roof framing overhangs at gable end, provide top plate for gable end wall framing. If roof framing is flush with gable end wall, notch studs to fit nail to end rafter.

3.3 JOIST FRAMING

A. Provide joist sizes and spacing indicated. Install with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2" of bearing on wood. Support members alternately at ends with solid backing (unless nailed to a header or band member) and between members crossing overbearing point with solid blocking. Use blocking 2" thick by depth of joists.





B. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4" or securely tie opposing members together. Attach to wood bearing members as shown on the drawings.

C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers. Double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4'. Support with metal joist hangers countersunk top and bottom.

D. Under jamb studs at openings, provide solid blocking between joists.

E. Under non-loadbearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to width of studs above.

1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures unless otherwise indicated.

F. Do not notch in middle third of joists and do not exceed 1/6 of depth of member for depth of notches in top and bottom of joists.

1. Limit end notches to 1/3 of depth of member.

G. Do not bore holes closer than 2" from top or bottom of joists, and limit diameter to 1/3 of depth of member.

H. Bridge between joists where nominal depth-to-thickness ratio exceeds 4, with bevel cut 1"x 4" or 2"x 3" double crossed wood bracing or with solid bridging 2" thick by depth of joist. End nail solid bridging to joists and nail both ends of cross bridging. Provide bridging as required by code but not less than one center bridging for spans over 10' and bridging spaced 8' o.c. for spans over 16'.

3.4 RAFTER AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Ceiling Joists: Provide member size and spacing shown, and as previously specified for joist framing. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.

1. Where principal ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, frame as indicated with additional short joist from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to long joists or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1 x 8 or 2 x 4 stringers spaced 4' o.c. crosswise over principal ceiling joist.

B. Rafters: Provide member size and spacing shown. Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use special metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing (if any), and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.





1. At valleys, provide valley rafter of size shown, or if not shown, provide rafter twice as thick as regular rafters and 2" deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafter.

2. At hips, provide hip rafters of size shown, or if not shown, provide of same thickness as regular rafters and 2" deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafters.

C. Provide collar beams (ties) as shown, or if not shown, provide 1" x 6" boards between every third pair of rafters. Locate below ridge member, 1/3 of distance to ceiling joists. Cut ends to fit slope and nail to rafters.

D. Provide special framing as shown for eaves, overhangs, dormers and similar conditions, if any.

3.5 TRUSSED RAFTERS

A. Provide trussed rafters where shown. Comply with applicable requirements of NLMA's "National Design Specifications for Stress Graded Lumber and Its Fastenings" and Truss Plate Institute's "Light Metal Connected Wood Trusses".

B. Fabricate Trusses as shown. Use wood materials of sizes shown, and of species and grade specified, or if minimum stress values and "E" value are specified, provide lumber of any species and grade complying with the specified values as published in official grading rules conforming to PS20 "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber."

C. Shop assemble trusses in plant of a recognized manufacturer of wood trusses, or in a plant of a fabricator licensed by such a manufacturer.

D. Provide pre-engineered and shop assembled trusses by a recognized manufacturer of wood trusses. Design for the span, loading, truss shape and spacing shown. Fabricate in plant of manufacturer or his licensed fabricator.

E. Store, handle and erect trusses in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required.

F. Store, handle and erect trusses so as to prevent damage. Use equipment as required to prevent undue stresses and distortions during handling and erection. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required.

3.6 TIMBER FRAMING

A. Provide wood beams and girders of the size and spacing shown. Install with crown edge up and provide not less than 4" bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless shown; tie together over supports if not continuous.





B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2" air space between sides and ends of wood members and supporting wall.

C. Where built-up beams or girders of nominal 2" dimension lumber on edge are shown, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not more than 32" o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. Locate end joints in members over supports; for continuous members, stagger ends at quarter points between supports.

D. Provide wood posts of the sizes shown. Provide metal anchoring and attachment devices as shown.

3.7 PLYWOOD SHEATHING

A. Provide plywood roof sheathing where shown. Install with face grain across supports, using panels continuous over 2 or more spans with end joints between panels staggered and located over center of supports.

1. Nail 6" o.c. along panel ends and 12" o.c. at intermediate supports for spans less than 48" using 6d common nails for panels 1/2" or less, 8d common nails for panels over 1/2" but less than 1" thick, and 8d ring shank or spiral thread nails or 10d common nails for panels 1" or more thick. For spans 48" or greater, space nails 6" o.c. at all supports.

2. Provide support at unsupported long edges with "ply clips" or wood blocking.

a. Allow 1/16" open space between end joints and 1/8" open space between edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels.

b. Allow 1/8" open space between end joints and 1/4" open space between edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels

B. Provide diaphragm construction roof sheathing as shown. Comply with nailing requirements shown for type of diaphragm (blocked or unblocked) as shown, or if not shown, comply with the requirements of APA Guide for type of diaphragm shown.

3.8 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER

A. Apply barrier per manufacturer instructions.

B. Apply barrier over sheathing.

3.9 DRAFTSTOP

A. Enclosed attic space shall be draftstopped into 3,000 square feet maximum floor areas. Use 1/2" exterior gypsum board screwed to attic framing. Draftstopping shall be continuous from eave to eave and deck to deck.





B. Provide minimum 3'-0" X 5'-0" smoke-proof access panel through all draftstop partitions.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Advise framing subcontractor of requirements for protection of wood frame construction during remainder of construction period. Advise installers of other work of required limitations on notching and boring holes through wood frame members.

B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on ends of treated wood sawn at job sites. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA GLUED LAMINATED TIMBERS



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fabrication and installation of glued laminated timbers (noted on Drawings as "GLUELAM BEAMS").


A. Section 061100 - Wood Frame Construction


A. Rough carpentry is a part of Section 061000.

B. Wood frame construction is part of Section 061100.


A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with PS 56, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber."

B. Provide factory-glued timber units, produced by an AITC licensed firm, qualified to apply the AITC "Quality Inspected" mark.

C. Factory mark each unit with AITC Quality inspected mark.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data, specifications and installation instructions covering lumber, adhesives, fabrication process, preservative treatment, accessories and protection.

1. Submit certification, signed by an officer of the manufacturing firm, indicating glued laminated timbers comply with requirements of PS 56.

B. Submit shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire structural system. Show large-scale details (not less than 3/4" to 1'- 0") of connections, connectors and other accessories. Indicate species and stress grade of lumber, type of glue, and other variables in required work.

1. To the extent engineering design considerations are specified as manufacturer's responsibility, show loading, section modulus, assumed allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations, and similar information needed for analysis.

2. Shop drawings shall be stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the state where project is constructed.





1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Keep glued laminated timbers dry during delivery, storage, handling, and erection, by maintaining factory-applied protective covering in weathertight and lightproof condition, or by applying other weathertight protection, until the building enclosure is completed to extent necessary for protection of interior glued laminated timbers work, and until final finishing of exterior work is ready to proceed. Do not store glued laminated timbers in areas of either excessively high or excessively low relative humidity; comply with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Time delivery and installation glued laminated timbers work to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with PS 56 and applicable lumber association standards cited therein for grades required to achieve glued laminated timber requirements for allowable stress, appearance, fabrication limitations and species (if any).

B. Lumber species shall be at manufacturer's option, as required to comply with other requirements.

C. Adhesive shall comply with PS 56 using wet-use (waterproof) adhesive, unless otherwise indicated.

D. End sealer shall be manufacturer's standard transparent, colorless wood sealer, effective in retarding transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts. Penetrating Sealer shall be manufacturer's standard translucent penetrating wood sealer.

E. Connectors, Anchors, Accessories: Provide fabricated steel (ASTM A36) shapes, plates and bars, welded into assemblies of types and sizes indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard units for timber sizes with steel bolts (ASTM A307) lag bolts (FS FF-B-561), and other standard fasteners as required.

1. Except as otherwise indicated, finish each assembly and fastener prior to use by cleaning and painting with rust-inhibitive primer, 2.0 mils dry film thickness.

2. Only fasteners manufactured in the United States may be used on this project.

2.2 TIMBER FABRICATION

A. Comply with PS 56 in providing units indicated; where dimensions are not completely documented, provide manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes required to fulfill indicated performances.





B. Provide fabricated units to comply with AITC Standards for following design stress ratings (psi in each case):

1. Dry Use Normal Bending: For principally bending perpendicular to wide faces of laminations:

a. F: (Allowable bending stress): 2,000 psi.

b. F: (Allowable tensile stress): 1,600 psi.

c. F: (Allowable compressive stress) parallel to grain: 1,500 psi.

d. F: perpendicular to grain: 385 psi.

e. F: (Allowable horizontal shear stress): 165 psi.

f. E: (modulus of elasticity): 1,700,000 psi.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, members have been designed on the basis of allowable stresses as indicated. Provide extension and modification of design work, based on specified allowable stresses and show calculations on shop drawings. Requests for manufacturer modification of allowable stresses, and resulting revision of member sizes and other features of design, cannot be considered except by way of general provisions for changes to Contract Documents.

D. Appearance Grade: Provide Industrial Grade timbers complying with AITC 110.

2.3 FACTORY APPLIED PROTECTION

A. Before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions, individually wrap each member with manufacturer's standard, opaque, durable water resistant, plastic coated paper covering with water resistant seams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. The Installer must examine supporting foundations or substructures to receive glued laminated timber work and conditions under which work is to be erected, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.2 TIMBER INSTALLATION

A. Comply with AITC 105 "Recommended Practice for the Erection of Structural Timber Framing".

1. Install miscellaneous steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as indicated.





B. Avoid cutting glued laminated timber members during erection to greatest extent possible. Except for fastener drilling and other minor cutting, coat cuts with end sealer as specified for "Fabrication".

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Fabricator and/or installer shall advise Contractor of necessary limitations on heating, ventilating and air conditioning in building in order to avoid damage or deterioration of work of this Section.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Finish carpentry work.

B. Millwork items, other than modular laminate casework (shelving units & window sills).

C. Shelving other than for modular casework.

D. Laminate case is specified in Division 12.

E. Typical wood base and shoe moulding and window/door casing as indicated on drawings. Match existing wood species and stain.


A. Millwork to be in accordance with AWI Quality Standards - Section 400, custom grade, except as modified herein.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.

B. For millwork: Indicate materials and wood species, thicknesses of materials, component profiles, fastening, jointing details, finishes and accessories to a minimum scale of 3/4" to 1'.

C. For finish carpentry items: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, joining details, finishes and accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2" to 1'.

D. Submit manufacturer's instructions for use of adhesive and hardware.

1.4 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples of plastic laminate for selection of colors and patterns. Submit manufacturer's product data with samples.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in accordance with Section 016000.

B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 16°C and maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55%.





1.6 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

A. Provide a written guarantee in accordance with Section 013300.

B. Guarantee shall provide for making good or replacing, at no cost to the Owner, millwork and finish carpentry items specified herein which exhibit defects in material and workmanship within a minimum period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE

A. Plastic Laminate: Thermally Fused Laminate shall meet the performance requirements of NEMA LD3-1995 for GP-28. Panel manufacturer shall provide published specification.

B. Colors and patterns as selected by Architect and approved by Owner. Three colors maximum. Manufacturer standard colors will be used (Grey, Beige, and White).

2.2 MILLWORK

A. Quality of Fabrication: AWI's Custom Grade construction - Section 400.

1. Provide thermally fused laminate clad shelving units where indicated on drawings.

B. Framing: C and better #2 Southern or Parana Pine, S4S.

C. Laminate clad window sills as detailed in Procedure Room, with 3 mm edge banding.

2.3 MOULDINGS

A. Wood mouldings and casings to match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with approved shop drawings.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place rigid, plumb and square.

C. Verify mechanical, electrical and building items affecting this Section are placed and ready to receive this work.





D. Trim and Mouldings: Install in single, un-jointed lengths for openings and for runs less than maximum length of lumber available. For longer runs, use only one piece less than maximum length available in any straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members cope at returns and miter at corners.

3.2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust hardware to ensure smooth and correct operation.

B. Finish hardware of all types shall be fitted and secured to prevent looseness and rattle but shall not be fitted so tightly as to result in binding.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA MASONRY WATER REPELLENT



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Penetrating masonry water repellent to seal all exterior masonry surfaces.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry.

B. Section 079000 - Joint Sealants.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. AASHTO T-259 - Salt Water Ponding.

B. ASTM E 303 - Traction Characteristics.

C. ASTM C 642 - Water Penetration.

D. ASTM C 672 - Freeze-Thaw Durability.

E. ASTM G 23 - Accelerated Weathering.

F. Other requirements for reference standards are defined in Section 014200.


A. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in water repellent systems with a minimum of five years experience.

B. Applicator shall be an experienced company specializing in water repellent applications that has been authorized, trained and certified by the primary water repellent manufacturer.

C. Pre-Test: An eight square foot (8 safe.) area on the job shall be treated and evaluated in accordance with primary water repellent manufacturer's recommendations and written test procedures which would allow the water repellent to cure for a minimum of 5 days.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation recommendations under provisions in Division 1 - Submittals.

B. Submit the manufacturer's certification that the applicator has been trained and is authorized to install the water repellent treatment.





1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Ambient temperatures shall be between 20°F and 100°F.

B. No rain predicted for a minimum of 2 hours after application.

C. No precipitation within 24 hours prior to application.

D. No high winds that would cause an improper application rate.

E. Protect all plants and vegetation from damage by product overspray.

F. Do not spray on or near plastic or specialty coated glass without adequately protecting these surfaces.

G. Caution should be taken near all asphalt based material sand painted surfaces.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDELING

A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original undamaged containers with labels and seals intact.

B. Consult manufacturer's application instructions and Material Safety Data Sheet for additional safety instructions.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide a 10-year manufacturer warranty for cost of labor and materials for loss of water repellency with a no dollar limit on labor and materials.

1. 5 YEAR WARRANTY FOR 20% SILANE.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Material shall be 40% isobutyl trimethoxy silane in an ethanol solution.

B. Qualities of Product.

1. Water Penetration: ASTM 6642-24 hoorsoak minimum 90%.

2. Surface Appearance: no change in surface appearance or texture.

3. Penetration: average 3/32".

4. Drying time: Must be dry and ready to use within 1 hour after application.






1. "CHEM-TRETE BSM 40," Huls America, Inc., Pistaway, N.J., (908) 980-6800.

2. "Rainstopper 140" Textured Coatings of America.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are solid, dry, and free of frozen matter, loose particles, cracks, pits, laitance, curing compounds and other foreign matter that would block absorption of the water repellent.

B. Verify that masonry and mortar has cured a minimum of 28 days.

C. Verify that the curing of caulking and/or sealing materials is complete.

D. Repair cracks over 5 mil wide by means of caulking or grouting.

E. Cure of tuck pointing shall be a minimum of 3 days.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare surfaces by removing contaminants that would block the pores of the surface.

B. General masonry cleaning is executed under Section 042000 - Unit masonry.

C. The method of surface preparation must be adequate to allow proper penetration of water repellent material (verify with manufacturer).

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Water Repellent shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

B. Provide adequate ventilation during the application.

C. Provide all safety precautions required by occupational jurisdiction. Consult the manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and application instructions for further safety information.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An on-site manufacturer's inspector shall be provided during the application of the water repellent material as required by manufacturer to comply with warranty requirements.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA INSULATION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Blown Fiberglass insulation.

B. Fiberglass thermal batt insulation.

C. Insulation board sheathing.

D. Fiberglass acoustical batt insulation.


A. Requirements for reference standards are defined in Section 014200.

B. FS HH-I-521E - Insulation blankets, thermal fiber for ambient temperatures.

C. FS HH-I-125B - Insulation, Thermal, Reflective (Aluminum Foil).

1.3 PRODUCT DATA

A. Before installing insulation, submit manufacturer's product data in accordance with General Conditions.

B. Indicate complete description and performance of insulation and manufacturer installation suggestions.

1.4 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS

A. Furnish material in manufacturer packaging, complete with installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BLOWN CELLULOSE INSULATION

A. Size: 9" thick as indicated on drawings.

B. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Applegate

2. International Insulation

2.2 FIBERGLASS THERMAL BATT INSULATION

A. Type: Foil faced fiberglass thermal batt insulation.

B. Type: Unfaced fiberglass thermal batt insulation.





C. Size: As shown on Drawings.

D. R-Values required: R-11 (3-5/8" or 4" thick), R-19 (6" or 6-3/4 thick).

E. Manufacturers/Products:

1. Schuller, Building Insulation Division, Denver, CO, "Thermal-Shield".

2. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., Toledo, OH, "Thermal Batt Insulation".

2.3 INSULATION BOARD SHEATHING

A. Type: Extruded polystyrene foam insulation board, with high density, smooth surfaces, and tongue-and-groove or shiplap edges.

B. Location: To be used as sheathing on exterior face of exterior steel studs, as shown on Drawings (noted as "sheathing").

C. Thickness: 1/2" thick

D. Manufacturers/Products:

1. Owning-Corning / Foamular XPS Pro Pink

2. Dow Building Solutions / Sytrofoam

2.4 FIBERGLASS ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATION

A. Type: Lightweight, unfaced, fiberglass cavity fill insulation. Designed to reduce sound transmission.

B. Size:

1. 2-3/4 Batts (2-1/2" STUDS).

2. 4" Batts (3-1/2" - 3-5/8" STUDS).

3. 6-3/4" Batts (5-1/2" - 6" STUDS).

C. Manufacturer's Products:

1. Schuller, Building Insulation Division, Denver, CO, "Sound-Shield".

2. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Cop., Toledo, OH, "Sound Attenuation Batt".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF BLOWN INSULATION

A. Install blown insulation as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Install around light fixtures to allow for proper ventilation.





3.2 INSTALLATION OF BATT INSULATION

A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer'S published recommendations and without visible gaps or separations. Install after mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed.

B. In exterior walls, install batt insulation with reflective foil facing interior of building.

C. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of ripped backs and edges.

D. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.

E. No foil faced batt insulation shall remain exposed. Protect as required.

F. All exposed thermal Batt Insulation SHALL BE FIRE RATED.

G. Install batts to underside of first floor using steel insulation supports at 2'-0" o.c.

H. All Batts installed in required fire-rated assemblies shall be fire-rated.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION BOARD SHEATHING

A. Fasten boards to wood studs using drywall screws. Penetrate minimum 1/2" into stud.

B. Fasten boards to metal studs using sheet metal screws. Penetrate minimum 3/8" into stud.

C. Install boards horizontally.

D. All vertical joints shall be at centerline of a stud. Stagger vertical joints.

E. Join edges tightly to allow tongue-and-groove or shiplap edge to shed water.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA AIR BARRIERS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Includes but not limited to:

1. Furnish and install air barrier/weather resistant barrier over exterior of wall sheathing at all locations regardless of whether or not indicated on drawings to protect exterior sheathing and interior walls.


A. Section 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials.

B. Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry.

C. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections.

B. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data and installation instructions of manufacturer equaling or exceeding those specified.


A. Installer with successful experience in the installation of air barrier/secondary weather resistant barriers.

B. Install job mock-up using specified air barrier/secondary weather resistant barrier with system of fastening and taping seams as per manufacturer’s instructions. Obtain architect’s approval of system for appearance and workmanship standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Products:

1. DuPont Weatherization Systems, 4417 Lancaster Pike, Building 728, Wilmington, DE 19805, Phone: 800-448-9835, E-mail: www.tyvek.com.





2. Raven Industries Fortress Pro.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. DuPont™ Tyvek CommercialWrap®: A flash spunbonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated secondary weather resistant barrier.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. AATCC-127, Water Penetration Resistance, exceeded at 280.

2. TAPPIT-460, Gurley Hill (sec/100cc) Air infiltration at >1500 seconds.

3. ASTM E 96 Method B (g/m2-24hr) Water vapor transmission of 200.

4. TAPPI T-41D, Basis weight of 2.7 oz/yd.

5. ASTM E96 Method B, Water Vapor Transmission, 28 perms.

6. ASTM E1677, Air Retarder Material Standard Specification, Type I air barrier.

C. Sealing Tape/Fasteners

1. DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape, DuPont Weatherization Systems.

2. For steel frame construction: DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws, DuPont Weatherization Systems. 1-5/8” rust resistant screws with 2” diameter plastic cap.

3. For wood frame construction: DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps, DuPont Weatherization Systems. Nails with large heads or plastic washers.

4. Caulks or Sealants: polyurethane or elastomeric sealants.

a. Available Products:

1) OSI® Quad Pro-Series®, solvent release butyl rubber sealant.

2) DAP® Dynalfex 230™. 3) Other products as approved and recommended by air barrier/weather

resistant barrier manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Air Barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing.

1. Install Air Barrier after sheathing is installed and before windows and doors are installed. Install lower level barrier prior to upper layers to ensure proper shingling of layers.

2. Overlap Air Barrier at corners of building by a minimum of 12 inches.

3. Overlap Air Barrier vertical seams by a minimum of 6 inches.

4. Ensure barrier is plum and level with foundation, and unroll extending Air Barrier over window and door openings.





5. Attach Air Barrier to wood, insulated sheathing board or exterior gypsum with plastic cap nails every 12” to 18” on vertical stud line with wood stud framing, and screws with washers to metal stud framing. When attaching to masonry, use adhesive recommended by manufacturer.

6. Prepare window and door rough openings as follows:

a. Prepare each window rough opening by cutting a modified “I” pattern in the Air Barrier.

1) Horizontally but Air Barrier along bottom of header.

2) Vertically cut Air Barrier down the center of window openings from the top of the window opening down to 2/3 of the way to the bottom of the window openings.

3) Diagonally cut Air Barrier from the bottom of the vertical cut to the left and right corners of opening.

4) Fold side and bottom flaps into window opening and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess.

b. Prepare each rough door opening by cutting a standard “I” pattern in the Air Barrier.

1) Horizontally cut Air Barrier along bottom of door frame header and along top of sill.

2) Vertically cut Air Barrier down the center of door openings from the top of the door opening (header) down to the bottom of the door opening (sill).

3) Fold side flaps inside around door openings and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess.

7. Tape all horizontal and vertical seam of Air Barrier with DuPont™Tyvek® Tape. 8. Seal all tears and cuts in Air Barrier with DuPont™Tyvek® Tape.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA ASPHALT SHINGLES



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Furnish and install shingles as shown on Drawings.

B. Provide shingle-over ridge vent.

C. Clay tile ridge caps where indentified on drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations from shingle manufacturer, including data that materials comply with requirements.

B. Submit 2 full size shingles for verification of each color/style/texture selected.

C. Submit approved nailing pattern to be used in a hurricane region for 100 mph winds.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Provide shingle manufacturer's warranty on installed work agreeing to pay for repair or replacement of defective shingles as necessary to eliminate leaks. Period of warranty is a minimum of 30 years after date of substantial completion.

B. Provide a 100 mph wind warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHINGLES

A. Mineral surfaced asphalt fiberglass shingles bearing UL Class "A" fire resistive label and Class "H" UL 2390 "Wind Resistant" label. Color and pattern to be selected from manufacturer's standard products.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corp.

b. GAF Corp.

c. Tamko

d. Timberline

e. Owens-Corning

f. Mansville





2.2 UNDERLAYMENT

A. Provide manufacturer's peel and stick water barrier/weather shield type underlayment, leak barrier; minimum thickness: 40 mils.

B. Acceptable Products:

1. GAF, Storm Guard

2. Tamko, TW underlayment

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Hot dipped zinc coated, 11 or 12-gauge barbed shank, minimum 3/8" diameter head, sharp pointed conventional roofing nails, of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

B. Shingle-over ridge vent.

C. Clay tile ridge caps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers. Store materials to avoid water damage. Store rolled goods on end.

B. Proceed with shingle work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed.

C. Proceed with shingle work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and when substrate is completely dry.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Installer of shingles must examine substrate and conditions under which shingling work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with this work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.3 PREPARTION OF SUBSTRATE

A. Clean substrate of any projections and substances detrimental to shingling work.

B. Coordinate installation of shingles with flashing and other adjoining work to insure proper sequencing.





3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install "Asphalt Shingle Roofing for High Wind Regions" as outlined by "Home Builders Guide to Coastal Construction" FEMA 499.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA VINYL SIDING AND ACCESSORIES



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for the complete installation of the following:

1. Classic beaded 8" vinyl soffit. Vented and non-vented.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061100 - Wood Frame Construction.


A. Comply with the following codes:

1. ASTM D3679-81a - Standard Specifications for PVC Siding.

2. Building Officials and Code Administrators International Incorporated (BOCA) Research Report #86-36.

3. International Conference of building officials (ICBO) Report #3985.

4. State of Connecticut Board of Materials review; File #BMR 008-82.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Siding and accessories shall be solid extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound as defined in ASTM D3679-81a - Standard Specification for PVC Siding.

B. Material properties:

1. All panels shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM 3679 Section 4.02.

2. Specific gravity: 1.38 to 1.49.

3. Hardness "Shore D": 76+ 3.

4. Tensile strength: 5,600 to 6,200 PSI.

5. Tensile modulus: 360,000 to 400,000 PSI

6. Heat deflection under load (264 PSI fiber stress): 162º F.

7. Izod impact strength: 3.3 foot pounds per inch of notch.

8. Coefficient of expansion: 3.36 X 10-5 inch per inch per degree F.

C. Flame Resistance:

1. ASTM E84

a. Flame spread: less than 25.

b. Fuel contribution: 0.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA VINYL SIDING AND ACCESSORIES



c. Smoke density: over 500.

2. ASTM D635

a. Average time of burning: less than 5 seconds.

b. Average length of burning: 20 millimeters.

3. ASTM D02843 (UBC #52-2)

a. Smoke density: 60.

D. Minimum Thickness: .042"

2.2 MANUFACTURER/PRODUCT

A. Alside/Greenbriar Vintage beaded soffit or approved equal.

2.3 FINISH

A. Soffit and trim shall be produced from PVC compound containing color pigments to provide color throughout thickness of material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Before starting work, verify governing dimensions at building.

B. Examine, clean and, if necessary repair any adjoining work on which this work is dependent for its proper installation.

C. Install siding and trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 CLEANUP

A. Upon completion clean all vinyl work, and wash down siding and trim to remove fingerprints, soil areas, etc.

B. Remove all scrap materials.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA FIBER CEMENT SIDING



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Siding panels.

B. Accessories and trim.



B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants

C. Section 099000 - Painting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM:

1. C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

2. C1185 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non Asbestos Fiber-Cement Flat Sheet, Roofing and Siding Shingles, and Clapboards

3. C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement Sheets

4. E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction

5. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

6. E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

7. E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750˚C

8. E228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer

9. G26 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

10. E330-97 - Structural Performance of exterior windows, curtain walls and doors by uniform static air pressure difference.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300.





B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods, including nailing patterns.

4. Applicable model code authority evaluation report (ICC, CCMC, etc.).


A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installer with not less than three years of experience with products similar to those specified.


A. Store products off the ground, on a flat surface, and under a roof or separate waterproof covering.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. 50-year limited siding warranty.

B. Provide 15-year limited paint warranty.

C. Register manufacturer's warranty, made out in Owner's name, with copy to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. HardiPlank

2. Allura

3. Plycem

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000.

2.2 PANELS

A. Fiber Cement Board Panels - General Cement Board Panels consist of cement, recycled content and cellulose fiber under high pressure into boards with integral surface texture; complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; machined edges; for nail attachment.





1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 0, smoke developed index of 5; maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (Class I/A).

2. Flammability: Noncombustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136.

3. Flexural Strength: At least 1450 psi (10 MPa) when in equilibrium condition, and at least 1015 psi (7 MPa) when in wet condition, tested in accordance with ASTM C1185.

4. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: Less than 1 x 10^-5/inch/inch/degree F (0.5 x 10^-5/degree C), when tested in accordance with ASTM E228.

5. Freeze Thaw Resistance: At least 80% flexural strength retained, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1185.

6. UV Resistance: No cracking, or erosion, when tested for 2000 hours in accordance with ASTM G26.

7. Water Tightness: No water droplets on underside, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1185.

B. Horizontal Siding: Lap Siding

1. Thickness: 5/16", plus or minus .04"

2. Length: 12', plus 0, minus 1/8"

3. Field Finish Paint: 100% acrylic latex as specified in Section 099000.

4. Style: Cedar lap siding

a. Width: Match existing

5. Sealant/Primer: Our primary Sealant/Primer.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim: Trim/Fascia Board

1. Size:

a. Thickness: 1"

1) Width: As detailed

2) Length: 12' plus or minus 1/8"

3) Rustic style to match existing

B. Provide the following trim:

1. Starter strip for lap siding

2. Outside corners, butted to siding

3. Outside corners, overlapping siding

4. Fascia board

5. Trim at beams as detailed

C. Sealant: Paintable, 100% acrylic latex caulk complying with ASTM C920.





D. Sheet Metal Flashing: Minimum 26-gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, or coated aluminum.

E. Nails: Length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4" into solid backing; hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.

F. Building Paper: Kraft or bituminous paper; not polyethylene or foil.

G. Field Finish Paint: 100% acrylic latex as specified in Section 099000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to commencing installation, verify governing dimensions of building and condition of substrate.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine, clean, and repair, as necessary, any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation.

B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawing details.

1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.

2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of project.

3. Use trim details indicated on drawings.

4. Touchup all field cut edges before installing.

5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.

B. Over Foam Sheathing: Read and comply with sheathing manufacturer's recommendations.

1. For sheathing of 1" thickness or less, nail through sheathing into studs using correspondingly longer nails.

C. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement; seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.





D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are inevitable, stagger joints between successive courses.

E. Furred Installation: Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind soffit; at bottom install insect screen over opening by wrapping a strip of screen over bottom ends of vertical furring strips.

F. Install sheet metal flashing above door and window casings and horizontal trim in field of siding.

G. Do not install siding less than 6" from surface of ground nor closer than 1" to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.

H. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges.

I. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 099000.

J. Finish Painting: Within 6 months after installation, paint siding and trim with one coat primer and two coats finish paint.

3.4 CLEANING

A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.

B. Touchup, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Work:

1. Section 079000 - Joint Sealants.


A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

176-77, Stainless and Heat Resistant Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

A526-71, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process).

B32-76.

D412-75 Rubber Properties in Tension.

D624-73 Rubber Property - Tear Resistant.

D746-73, Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.

D2240-75, Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.

B. Federal Specifications (FS):

SS-C-00253A, Cement, Bituminous, Plastic.

TT-P-645, Primer, Paint Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for each shop or field fabricated item showing joints, types and locations of fasteners, and special shapes.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation and welding instructions for manufactured items.

1.4 GUARANTEE

A. Unless other guarantee requirements are specified, furnish written guarantee for materials and workmanship for two-year period signed by installer and contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A526, commercial quality, paint grip type.

1. Where flashing type and gauge is not indicated, use 24-gauge minimum (.0239") galvanized sheet steel.





B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A176, Type 302/304 soft temper.

C. Lead:

1. Antimony 4% to 6%, remainder lead.

2. Weight: 3 pounds/square feet

2.2 PREPAINTED GALVANIZED SHEET METAL

A. 24-gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel (G90), commercial quality, primed and finished on finish side with fluoropolymer coating.

1. Dry film thickness of coating 1 mil (+ 0.1 mil).

2. Protect finished side with factory installed strippable film.

B. Apply wash coat of .3 to .4 mil dry film thickness to the reverse side.

C. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standards.

D. Provide a written 20-year non-prorated warranty covering fade, chalking, and coating integrity. Warranty shall include cost of labor and materials.

E. Manufacturers/products:

1. Foremost Manufacturing Co., Livonia, MI, "Kynar 500 Sheet Stock".

2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation, Elk Grove, IL, "PAC-CLAD Steel".

3. Vincent Metals, Building Products Group, Minneapolis, MN, "ColorKlad".

2.3 FLASHING

A. Elastomeric Sheet Flashing:

1. Neoprene, uniform flexible sheets, 1/16" thick minimum complying as follows:

a. Hardness (ASTM D2240): 50 to 70 Shore A.

b. Tensile strength (ASTM D412): 1800 psi.

c. Ultimate elongation (ASTM D412): 300%.

d. Brittleness temperature (ASTM D746): -30˚F.

e. Tear resistance (ASTM D624): 150 lbs/lin. inch.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Gates Engineering Company Inc.

b. Carlisle Tire and Rubber Company





2.4 VENTS

A. Round soffit vents: 2.5" aluminum, round pop-in screened soffit vents.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Solder: 50% tin and 50% lead, ASTM B32.

B. Flux: Rosin, cut muratic acid, or commercial preparation for materials to be soldered.

C. Neutralizer: 5% to 10% washing soda solution.

D. Fasteners:

1. Barbed roof nails, clips, or self-tapping sheet metal screws.

2. Metal compatible with sheet metal or flashing material shall be stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized steel.

E. Elastomeric Flashing Protective Coating:

1. Hypalon coatings as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. First coat: Aluminum.

3. Second coat: Color as selected by Architect.

F. Adhesive: As recommended by elastomeric manufacturer for bonding to substrate and for waterproof sealing of flashing seams.

G. Bituminous Plastic Cement: FF SS-C-00153, Type I.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Type: Non-staining silicone sealants.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers/Products:

1. Pecora Corp., Harleysville, PA, "60+ Unicrylic".

2. Tremco, Cleveland, OH, "Mono".

C. Location: In contact with roofing or waterproof materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect surfaces for conditions detrimental to work.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.





3.2 FABRICATION

A. Form sheet metal on bending brake.

B. Do shaping, trimming, and hand seaming on bench as far as practicable.

C. Make angle bends and folds for interlocking metal with full regard for expansion and contraction to avoid buckling or fullness in metal after installation.

D. Fabricate supplemental parts necessary to complete each item of work.

E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles, and smooth curves.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of work.

2. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15' running length maximum.

3. For flashing and trim, space expansion joints maximum of 10 ft. located 2' from corners and intersections.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible.

5. Fold back edges of concealed side of exposed edge to form hem.

6. Insert metal flashings into reglets, anchor with fasteners and wedges, and seal joints.

7. Set sheet metal items level, true to line, and plumb.

8. Secure to wood with screws or nails and washers.

9. Set metal already partly formed in place and fasten by means of cleats.

10. Where flashing type and gage is not indicated, use 24-gauge minimum galvanized sheet steel.

B. Pre-painted galvanized sheet metal.

1. Exercise care during fabrication and erection to avoid damage to finish coat.

2. Use color matched touch-up paint and rivets where exposed to view or otherwise required.

3. Mechanically remove coating if soldering is necessary.

4. Fabricate and install with strippable film in place. After installation is complete, immediately remove strippable film to avoid damage to paint coating underneath due to ultraviolet light.

C. Elastomeric Base Flashing:

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of elastomeric flashing.

2. Extend base flashing onto roof deck minimum of 4" on top of roofing felts.





3. Do not seal at top edge of ventilating felt to allow felt to breathe.

4. Seal seams and projections through sheet.

5. Bond to vertical and horizontal surfaces.

6. Mop on 8" minimum width strip flashing of roofing felt overlapping edge of flashing and onto deck.

7. Apply two coats of hypalon protective coating on exposed elastomeric surface.

D. Gutters and Downspouts (copper gutter and downspouts to match existing).

1. Fabricate gutter without minimum amount of joints. Provide closure pieces at ends.

2. Fabricate downspout in one piece, without seams. Anchor to face brick with sheet metal straps.

E. Round soffit vents: Pop-in screened aluminum round soffit vents between each exposed rafter tail as detailed.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Fire-stopping: Systems (Material or combination of materials) used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases through penetrations in fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

A. UL rated fire-stop systems shall be used to seal penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.

1. Slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.

2. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.

3. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.

4. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

5. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls. 6. Other locations where specifically shown on the drawings.

1.4 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work of other sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections, including but not limited to:

1. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants

2. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry

3. Section 092600 - Gypsum Board Systems.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops".





B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their destination of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually with a mid-year supplement. (Verify compliance with current U.L rated system).

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: (Volume 1 and 2).

C. ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. All three major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, and BOCA.

E. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.


A. Fire-stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of the construction being penetrated.

B. Proposed fire-stop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction.

1. Submit system and material for Architect's review prior to installation.

C. Fire-stop Systems do not re-establish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/ assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the Architect prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL fire-stop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300.

B. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to jobsite.


A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type and UL label where applicable.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at jobsite.





C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements.

D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable.

E. Do not use damaged or expired material.


A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

B. Schedule installation of fire-stopping after completion of penetration item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.

C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of fire-stop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet.

E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent fire-stopping materials from contamination any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only fire-stop products that have been UL 1479 or ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.

2. Surfaces to which fire-stop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion.

3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by fire-stopping materials.





4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of fire-stopping.

5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Regulatory Requirements: Install fire-stop materials in accordance with published "Through-Penetration Fire-stop Systems" in UL's Fire Resistance Directory.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration materials.

1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.

2. Consult with Architect/mechanical engineer prior to installation of UL fire-stop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.


A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities and Architect.

C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of fire-stopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing fire-stop systems already installed by other trades.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess fire-stop materials and soiling as work progresses.

3.5 SYSTEM OPTIONS

A. Contractor shall propose in writing a UL system when a penetration method is not identified by number and when an alternate method is proposed.





3.6 PROTECTION AND SCHEDULE

A. Protect finished work from damage by other trades and general construction for remainder of project.

B. Submit schedule of all systems installed upon completion of project.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA JOINT SEALANTS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work of this section includes all exterior sealant work and all interior caulking work which is not specified as the work of a particular section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Flashing sealant is a part of Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.



1.4 PRODUCT DATA AND APPROVAL

A. Before ordering any material, submit for Architect's approval complete manufacturer specifications of all materials specified in this section, including surface preparation and installation requirements.


A. Applicator shall be experienced and trained in the techniques of caulking and sealant applications and shall be thoroughly familiar with recommendations of the manufacturer for the specified caulking and sealants. Selection of the proper sealant and caulking compound for particular joints shall be in accordance with current recommendations published by the manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to job in original, unopened containers with manufacturer's brand name clearly marked on all containers. Handle and store materials in original packages in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. Upon completion and acceptance of the project, furnish to the Owner through the Architect a written guarantee. Guarantee all items and work included in this section for a period of two years from date of acceptance against defective workmanship and materials.

B. Defects resulting from faulty materials and/or workmanship during the guarantee period shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his expense.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAULKING COMPOUND (FOR INTERIOR USE ONLY)

A. Type: Oil-based, one part component non-hardening, gun grade, paintable.


1. DAP, Div. of Beecham, Dayton, OH, "Architectural Caulk".

2. Pecora Corp., Harleysville, PA, "200R2 Architectural Caulking Compound".

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Type: One component, non-sagging, non-staining, non-hardening.


1. Dow Corning, Midland, MI, "790 Silicone Building Sealant, one component silicone".

2. General Electric Co., Waterford, NY, "Silpruf, one component silicone".

3. Pecora, "Synthacalk GC-9, one component polysulfide base".

2.3 PREPARATORY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Backer Rod for Exterior Sealant: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant manufacturer.

1. Thickness before compression: twice thickness of joint.


a. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc., Cambridge, Mass., "Polytite Standard".

b. Williams Products, Inc., Troy, Mich., "Everlastic".

D. Backer Rod for Expansion Joints: Extruded foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polybutylene material.


a. Sandell "Poly-Tite Standard".

b. Williams "Everlastic".





E. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION/INSTALLATION

A. Perform all sealant work in accordance with caulking and sealant manufacturer published instructions.

B. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with caulking and sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

C. Ensure that joint forming materials are compatible with sealant and caulking compound.

D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. Use approved joint backer rod to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly. Use bond breaker where required.

E. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.

F. Form joints slightly concave and straight edges. Sealant must be free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges and sags.

3.2 CLEANING

A. As work progresses, remove excess materials adjacent to joints. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surfaces.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Non-fire-rated steel doors with glass and without glass.

B. Fire-rated steel doors with glass and without glass.

C. Steel frames for glazed openings, steel doors and other doors specified in other sections.

D. Installation of finish hardware.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Furnishing of finish hardware is a part of Section 087100 - Finish Hardware.

B. Finish painting of doors and frames is a part of Section 099000 - Painting.



B. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute.

C. Underwriters' Laboratory Inc. and Factory Mutual as applicable to fire rated steel doors and frames.

D. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process.

E. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.

F. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc Coated.

G. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 014300.

B. Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, reinforcements, hardware locations, and locations of cutouts. Indicate thickness of metal and type and thickness of shop coating and UL Rating. Coordinate the work of this Section with requirements for doors specified in other sections.

C. Submit product data with shop drawings.





1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, PROTECTION

A. Deliver, handle, and store so as not to damage or deform. Abraded, scarred or rusty areas shall be cleaned and painted immediately upon detection.

B. Frames of welded unit construction shall have temporary steel spreaders welded at bottoms of frames or bucks strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing during shipment.

C. Doors and frames stored at site shall be stacked on platforms or pallets and stored in weather-tight location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL FRAMES

A. Type: Welded unit construction of cold-rolled furniture stock steel free of defects, warp and buckle.

1. Molded members to be clean-cut, straight and true.

2. Corner joints to be coped or mitered, well formed, in true alignment and with continuous weld on inside of frame.

3. Fasteners to be concealed where practicable.

B. Gage/Finish:

1. Exterior frames: 14 -gauge, fabricated of hot dipped galvanized steel and coated with rust inhibitive primer.

2. Interior frames: 16-gauge, bonderized and coated with zinc chromate rust inhibitive primer, baked on.

3. Provide 14-gauge frames for all exterior and interior doors 4' or wider.

C. Provisions in Frames for Hardware:

1. Prepare frames at factory for installation of hardware.

2. Frames to be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped to templates to receive mortised template hinges, lock stripes, flush bolts, and overhead door closers.

3. Reinforcing Plates: 11-gauge for mortised hardware and lock strikes, 14-gauge for surface applied hardware.

4. Cover Boxes: Provide in back of hardware cutouts.

5. Silencers: Door Frames shall be complete with three rubber silencers on lock side of single doors and one silencer for each leaf in heads of double door frames.





D. Anchors: Not less than three adjustable anchors, spaced not over 24" apart, on each jamb (galvanized for exterior frames).

1. Galvanized metal clip angle to be welded to bottom of each jamb member for anchoring to floor construction.

2. Adjustable floor anchors are required where ceramic floor tile is scheduled.

2.2 STEEL DOORS

A. Type: Full flush type, seamless, heavy duty 1-3/4" thick, constructed of two 18-gauge Voss roller leveled prime quality cold-rolled steel sheets. Honeycomb core.

1. Top and bottom of doors to be closed with 16-gauge steel channels.

2. Vertical edge joint between face sheets to be continuously welded to vertical edge channels, grouted smooth, no exposed seams.

3. Exterior doors to have flush tops.

B. Provision in Doors for Hardware:

1. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap to receive template hinges, cylindrical or mortise locks, and flush bolts as required.

2. Provide special reinforcing for bored type locks and latches.

3. Provide reinforcing plates, kick and mop plates, and armor plates as required.

4. Provide 1” - 1-1/2” vinyl or neoprene door sweep at all exterior doors by Pemko or approved equal.

C. Glass Stops for Steel Doors: 18-gauge cold-rolled steel.

2.3 FIRE-RATED DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Each fire-rated door and frame shall bear Underwriters Laboratory Labels.

B. The labels on UL approved doors and frames must be a permanent type. "Stick-on" type labels are not acceptable.

2.4 FIRE-RATED STEEL DOORS

A. Each fire rated door shall bear Underwriters Laboratory Labels.

B. The labels on UL approved doors must be a permanent type. "Stick-on" type labels are not acceptable

C. All fire doors installed in Stairway enclosures shall bear a label indicating that the maximum transmitted and point temperature will not exceed 450°F above ambient at the end of 30 minutes.





2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Amweld

B. Ceco

C. MPI

D. Premier

E. Republic

F. Security Metal Products

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with approved shop drawings.

B. Install frames plumb, level, and rigidly secured in place.

C. Provide space around perimeter of both sides of frames to receive caulking or sealant.

D. Install temporary spreaders until frames are set and anchored.

E. Install bottom wall anchor on door frames approximately 24" above floor.

F. Doors shall fit squarely with frames and shall operate properly. Except as otherwise indicated, door clearances shall be not more than 3/32" at jambs and heads and 3/16" at bottom.

G. Install hardware without forcing with proper clearances and alignment, so that operation is smooth and easy, free of binding and/or twisting. Adjust doors and hardware for required operation.

H. Clean up hardware and adjacent surfaces upon completion. Do not use abrasives or liquid cleaners that shall harm permanent lacquer and plastic finishes.

I. Install hollow metal transoms using concealed fasteners.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA CLAD WOOD DOORS



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes:

1. Flush solid core low pressure clad or decorative laminate doors.

2. Factory fitting clad wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

3. Louvers installed in clad wood doors.

4. Light frames and glazing installed in clad wood doors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 1 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED documentation and requirements.

2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors and Wood Frames" for clad wood doors in wood frames.

3. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for clad wood doors in steel frames.

4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in wood doors.

5. Division 8 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware" for door hardware for clad wood doors.

6. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined clad doors and frames.

7. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security access system.

C. Standards and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard.

2. ASTM E90-90 - Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

3. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

4. Architectural Woodwork Standards - AWS Section 9, Doors; Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) and Woodwork Institute (WI).

5. Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) - Guidelines for environmentally certified wood doors.





6. Intertek Testing Service (ITS Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors.

7. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.

8. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association.

9. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

10. United States Green Building Council (USGBC).

11. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors.

12. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S. 10 Industry Standard for Testing Cellulosic Composite Materials for Use in Fenestration Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A or AWS classifications.

B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the clad door supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

3. Indicate fire protection ratings for fire rated doors.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For decorative laminate door faces.

1. Decorative laminate, 8" x 10", for each color and pattern selected.

2. Corner sections of doors, 5" x 11", with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.

3. Frames for light openings, 6" long, for each material, type, and finish required.

E. Informational Submittals:

1. Submit manufacturer's environmental documentation and applicable sustainability program credits that are available to contribute towards a LEED rated project certification.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranties.






A. Source Limitations: Obtain clad wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, latest edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors." and the following minimum values (for particle core doors):

1. NWWDA TM-7 Cycle Slam Test: 1,000,000 cycles.

2. NWWDA TM-8 Hinge Loading Test 1,000 lbs.

3. NWWDA TM-10 Edge Screw Holding Test 850 lbs.

4. NWWDA TM-10 Face Screw Holding Test 650 lbs.

C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide manufacturer’s construction label, indicating compliance to independent 3rd party certification agency’s procedure, except for size.

2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450˚F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure.

3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.

a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear "S" label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.

4. Blocking: When through-bolts are not to be used, indicate size and location of blocking in 45, 60 and 90 minute mineral core doors

D. Security Rating for Particle Core Doors: ASTM F 476, Grade 40.

E. Environmental Certification: Provide Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) authorized certificate for doors requiring environmental certification. Environmental certification ensures that wood components come from certified forests and are processed by certified chain-of-custody manufacturers.

1. LEED Certification: Doors manufactured under guidelines of LEED to be built to USGBC standards for contributing to LEED point calculations.

F. Sound Rating Test Reports: Submit manufacturer’s test results of STC ratings from testing performed by independent testing agency for sound resistant doors





G. Antimicrobial Surfaces: Silver-based resin surface achieving Pass grade conforming to JIS Z2801:2000 test method for antimicrobial efficacy including Escherichia coli and MRSA. Certification to be documented by reputable independent research institute.

H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing clad wood doors.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package clad wood doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4" in a 42" x 84" section.

b. Delaminating of face in decorative laminate faced doors.

2. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation according to manufacturer's written warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Premium.

B. Particleboard Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.





2. Wood Stiles and Rails: As required to meet Extra Heavy Duty Performance level.

3. Blocking: As required to meet Extra Heavy Duty Performance level.

C. Mineral Core Doors:

1. Core: Non-combustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw holding capability approved for use in doors of fire protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved screw holding capability and split resistance with outer stile matching polymer edging.

D. Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core specified above as needed to provide fire ratings indicated.

1. Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A). Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Category B Edge Construction: Provide minute fire rated doors as Category B, with smoke and fire seals (supplied by seal manufacturer) applied to frame.

3. Pairs: Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

a. Where required or specified, provide formed steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel.

E. Environmentally Responsible Doors: Provide where specified doors manufactured with the following environmentally responsible components:

1. Particleboard Core:

a. Certified Wood: Interior flush clad wood flush doors (including fire rated doors) to be manufactured in accordance with FSC principles and criteria for wood building component and have FSC Chain of Custody certification.

b. Recycled Content: Interior flush clad wood doors to contain a minimum of 70% recycled and recovered content as certified by Scientific Certification Systems (SCS).

c. Low Emitting Materials: Interior flush clad wood doors must contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.





2.2 DECORATIVE LAMINATE FACED DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Acrovyn vinyl clad flush door.

2. Eggers Industries – eiDoor.

3. The Maiman Company – Thermal Fused.

B. Low Pressure Decorative Laminate (LPDL) Thermal Fused Faces:

1. Low pressure decorative laminates faces thermally fused to cores under heat and pressure, complying with Laminating Materials Association’s Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Decorative Overlays. LMA.2003.

2. Wood Grain Pattern from Manufacturer's standard selections:

3. Exposed Edges: Impact resistant polymer edging, minimum .040" thick, applied to all four edges after faces.

a. Polymer Edging Color or Wood Grain Pattern: Manufacturer's standard color that most closely matches faces.

4. Provide doors with pilot holes factory drilled for vertical edge hinges and lock sets.

C. Antimicrobial Surface: Provide clad wood doors with an EPA and NSF listed silver-based, antimicrobial finish approved use in medical and food preparation equipment. Antibacterial certification to be documented by reputable independent research institute.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire rated doors.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."





3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA FINISH HARDWARE



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnishing of hardware for interior and exterior doors.


A. Installation of finish hardware is not a part of this Section.

B. Hardware for Door No. 1 Aluminum Clad Patio Door, shall be by door manufacturer.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 081000 - Steel Doors and Frames.

B. Section 081423 - Clad Wood Doors

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Material shall be furnished by firm regularly engaged in supplying finish hardware for commercial, industrial and institutional construction and have in their employee at least one (1) qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) that is a regular member in good standing of the Door and Hardware Institute. This supplier shall have an office and stocking warehouse within 120 miles of the project site with inventory to service the job and be available to later answer any questions the Owner may have.

B. Supplier shall furnish and deliver to Contractor at job site the finish hardware required for complete construction of this project. Hardware shall conform to drawings, schedules and these specifications.

C. Before delivery to job, Hardware Supplier shall clearly label each item of hardware showing Name of Job, Room Number, Hardware Set No., and Door Number. Boxes shall be so labeled.

D. Should hardware set for any opening be omitted or any hardware obviously necessary for completion of project, hardware of equal quality and design as specified for similar openings shall be used.

E. Hardware of equal quality and design of other recognized manufacturers are acceptable upon approval of Architect.

F. Hardware Supplier shall furnish all templates for complete installation of finish hardware.

G. Hardware for labeled doors shall meet requirements of Underwriters Laboratories.





1.5 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 014300. Submit samples of each type of hardware required for job. Indicate required style and finish.

B. Provide samples as requested by Architect. If no exception is taken, samples shall be returned to Hardware Supplier to be included in the Work.

1.6 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 014300. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.

B. Supply templates to door and frames manufacturer(s) to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs for hardware.

C. Submit one complete set of manufacturer's product data clearly identifying all scheduled hardware.

1.7 KEYING

A. All cylinders shall be master keyed and Grand Master keyed to an existing system.

B. Supply a list showing all key sets to the Architect.

C. The supplier shall meet with the Architect and Owner for keying instructions.

D. Cylinders and keys shall be stamped with their key code number.

E. Supply two sets for each lock, three grandmaster keys and nine master keys per set.

1.8 PUSH PLATES AND KICK PLATES

A. Fabricate from stainless steel, eased edges, .050 gauge.

1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Provide Architect with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

American Specialties Inc. (Toilet Accessory) Bradley (Toilet Accessory) Bobrick (Toilet Accessory) Corbin Div.





C. R. Lawrence DORMA Dor-O-Matic Gamco (Toilet Accessory) Glen-Johnson Hager H.B. Ives LCN Closers Lawrence Brothers McKinney Mfg. Co., Div. of Kidde, Inc. Monarch Door Controls National Guard Products Norton Door Controls Pemko Mfg. Co. Precision Hardware Inc. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co. Rixson-Firemark Rockwood Russwin Div., Emhart Hardware Group Sargent Schlage Lock Co. Stanley Hardware Trego Industries, Inc. Von Duprin, Inc. Yale

2.2 ABBREVIATIONS

SS - Stainless Steel 26D - Dull Finish (US26D) NRP - Non-rising Pin EDA - Extra Duty Arm OFCI - User Agency furnished, Contractor installed

2.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

H-1 Door #1 (By door manufacturer/supplier. Keyed on exterior, dead latch on

interior. Key to existing system)

H-2 Doors #11 & 12

3 Hinges TA2314 4 ½” x 4” x NRP x US10B McKinney 1 Exit device x trim 2100 x MO446F x 613 Yale 1 Closer 440 x 613E Yale 1 Kick plate K1050 8” x 34” x US10B Rockwood 1 Weatherstripping 303DS 3684 Pemko 1 Door sweep 345DV 36 Pemko 1 Threshold 2005AV 36 Pemko





H-3 Doors #2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, & 10 3 Hinges TA2714 4 ½” x 4 x US10B McKinney 1 Privacy lockset MO4602LN x 613 Yale 1 Stop 440 x US5 Rockwood

H-4 Doors #5 & 6

3 Hinges TA2714 4 ½” x 4 x US10B McKinney 1 Entry lockset MO4607LN x 613 Yale 1 Stop 440 x US5 Rockwood

H-5 Door #5 to Lab

3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4" x 652 McKinney 1 Push/Pull Set 110 x 70C x US32D Rockwood 1 Closer PA 3501 x 689 Yale 1 Kick plate K1050 8” x 2” LDW x US32D Rockwood 1 Stop 440 x US26D Rockwood 1 Perimeter Seal S88BL Pemko 1 Door Bottom 434 ARL (36") Pemko

2.4 TOILET ACCESSORIES (Based on Bradley)

131A Public, 133A Staff, & 104A Staff

Each Restroom to receive the following:

1 Mirror 18" x 36" 781 1 Soap Dispenser 6542 2 Grab Bars 36" and 42" 812 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 5234 1 Towel & Waste Receptacle 12-gal 234

Each Procedure Room, Lab, and Resource Room to receive the following:

1 Towel Dispenser 2447

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer recommendations, using proper templates.

B. Install toilet accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendation, using proper templates.

C. Contractor shall verify that all hardware and toilet accessories are installed in accordance with latest ADA guidelines and standards.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA GLASS AND GLAZING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work of this section includes all interior and exterior glass and glazing work that is not specified as the work of a particular section.


A. Each piece of glass shall bear manufacturer's label showing strength, grade thickness, type and quality. Labels shall remain until glass has been set and inspected.

B. When glass is not cut to size by manufacturer and is furnished unlabeled from local stock, submit affidavit stating quality, thickness, type and manufacturer of glass furnished.

C. Manufacture of glass and glazing materials and fabrication and installation of glazing materials shall meet the requirements of the Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR Part 1201), issued by the Consumer Product Safety Commission, and any amendments thereto.

1.3 SAMPLES AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 014300:

1. One 8"x 8" sample for each type of glass required.

2. Manufacturer's product data describing each type of glass.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEAR VISION GLASS, TEMPERED (interior aluminum partitions)

A. 1/4" thick, clear.

B. Manufacturers/Products:

1. Guardian "Tempered Clear Glass".

2. PPG "Herculite Clear Glass".

2.2 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl tape, 10-15 durometer hardness; paper release; color to match adjacent material.

B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene 70-90 durometer hardness, 4" long x 3/8" thick x 1/4" high.





C. Spacer Shims: Neoprene 50 durometer hardness; 3" long x 3/32" thick x 1/4" high.

D. Glazing Compounds: Modified oil type, of consistency to remain in original condition for minimum of two years. Shall contain no ingredients injurious to metal setting. Color to match adjacent materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLASS INSTALLATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent.

B. Cut glazing tape to proper length and set against permanent stops, 3/16" below sightline. Weld corners together by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

C. Apply bed of sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with glass.

D. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points.

E. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against sealant with sufficient pressure to ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter.

F. Install removable stops, spacer strips inserted between glass and applied stops at 2' intervals, 1/4" below sightline.

G. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8 inch below sightline.

H. Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform and level line, flush with sightline. Tool or wipe cap bead surface with solvent for smooth appearance.

3.2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT GLAZING

A. Glaze interior aluminum storefronts with clear glass.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF INSTALLED GLASS

A. After installation, mark glass with "X" using tape or removable paste. Do not use soap or cleaning powders that will "photograph" or etch glass and leave permanent impressions in glass.

3.4 CLEANING

A. During construction, examine all glass periodically to detect any form of staining or etching.

B. Immediately remove drippings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed.





C. At completion of work, leave glass in clean and unmarked condition.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Gypsum Board Installation.

B. Thermal and acoustical batt insulation - Refer to Section 072130 - Insulation.

C. Dry wall finishing.


A. Keep most current copy of Gypsum Association GA-216 in field office for duration of project.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Provide gypsum wallboard materials in accordance with recommendations of GA 216.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC.

2. U.S. Gypsum Co., Chicago, IL.

3. Georgia Pacific

C. Fire Rated, Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: Maximum permissible lengths, tapered edges (noted on Drawings as "Type X").

1. Thickness: 5/8" minimum or as indicated on drawings


a. Gold Bond, XP Fireshield or approved equal.

D. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Chemically treated multi-layered face and back paper and water resistant gypsum core, maximum permissible lengths.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES FOR INTERIOR WORK

A. Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with Gypsum Association GA 216.





B. Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping, Type "S". Size as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for wall and ceiling applications.

C. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel with paper tape wings 1-3/4" wide.

D. Edge Trim: Galvanized metal

E. Reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, fasteners: In accordance with Gypsum Association GA 216.

F. Acoustical Sealant: Waterless, non-bleeding, non-staining, pumpable, and applicable in beads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METAL FRAMING ERECTION

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install gypsum board in accordance with recommendations of Gypsum Association GA 216.

B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board (non-rated walls) in direction most practical and economical, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. For Fire Rated Wall and Ceiling Partitions:

1. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.

2. For double layer applications, erect first layer vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Stagger edges of sheets with those of adjacent layer.

3. Items built into fire rated walls shall be boxed in or enclosed with the same construction as the rated wall.

4. Provide U. L. design number to verify compliance with required rating.

5. Fire rated partitions shall be permanently identified with letting no smaller than 4" high to indicate type and rating of wall. Signage shall be located above ceiling systems and in other concealed spaces.

6. Provide fire-rated sealant, dampers, protection, etc. as required to maintain partition fire rating.

D. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.

E. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant and exterior gypsum board with approved sealant.

F. Place control joints where scheduled or 30'- 0" o.c. max.





G. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

H. Tape exposed joints, edges, corners, openings, and fixings.

I. Remove and re-do defective work.

J. Place acoustical sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and recommended guidelines of GA216 to achieve a minimum STC rating of 39 as tested per ASTM E90-75.

3.3 GYPSUM DRYWALL FINISHING

A. General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for painting or wall coverings. Pre-fill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer.

B. Apply joint tape between gypsum board, except where trim accessories are indicated.

C. Apply joint compound in 3 coats and sand between last 2 coats and after last coast. Feather-coat onto adjoining surfaces so that chamber is maximum 1/16".

3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to installer, which ensures gypsum dry wall work being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA CERAMIC - PORCELAIN TILE



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Ceramic and Porcelain tile floors and walls installed using the thinset bond coat method.





1. Tile samples for color and pattern selection.

2. Expansion joint materials (sealant and back up material)

3. Description of tile cleaner

4. Manufacturer's product data describing each type of tile

1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit maintenance data. Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended, stain removal methods and polishes and waxes recommended.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store materials in original containers with seal unbroken and label intact until time of use. Store and handle materials to prevent damage or contamination with water or foreign material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC FLOOR TILE (CT)

A. Type: Natural clay, unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.

B. Wearing surface: Slip resistant tile.

C. Nominal size: 2" x 2" x 1/4".

D. Face: Plain with cushion edges.

E. Manufacturers/Product:

1. American Olean Tile, “Ceramic Mosaic Products,” (Price Group 1 or 2) 2. Daltile, "Unglazed Mosaics", (Price Group 1 or 2)





2.2 CERAMIC GLAZED COVE BASE

A. Provide standard cove base units with ceramic floors in restroom.

2.3 UNGLAZED PORCELAIN PAVER FLOOR TILE (PT)

A. Type: Unglazed Porcelain paver.

B. Size: 12” x 12”

C. Color: Provide one field color and one accent color. Accent color shall be used as a border and in main corridor at furr-down ceiling areas. Verify on floor plan. (Select from stock colors, unpolished)

D. Provide cove base and other trim pieces to make a complete installation.

E. Manufactures/Products:

1. Daltile, Porcelain Paver; Continental Slate or approved equal.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. Marble. Color and finish to be selected by Architect; beveled one side; 3" wide, thickness to match floor tile.

2.5 MORTAR BED

A. For Thinset Bond Coat Method: Dry-set cementitious mortar.

B. Dry set mortar shall be Formula 759 or 763 as recommended by the Tile Council of America.

2.6 GROUT

A. For Tiles (CT1) and (PT2):

1. Type: Cementitious with latex additive; color to be selected by Architect.

2.7 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS

A. Sealants: For use in expansion joints, control joints, and other locations indicated, single component synthetic rubber base type, Shore a hardness of 35 in traffic areas. Sealants to be of non-sag type.

B. Backup Material: Polyethylene foam compatible with sealants. Material of size and shape indicated by joint details or as recommended by sealant manufacturer for size of joint and type of materials. Material to be of non-staining type.





2.8 TILE CLEANER & SEALER

A. Type: Of type recommended by tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MORTAR AND GROUT MIX

A. Mix and proportion cementitious material for site made mortar bed and bond coat.

B. Mix and proportion pre-mix setting bed and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install ceramic tile with 3/32" minimum thickness mortar bond coat.

B. Lay tile in standard grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Do not interrupt pattern through openings.

C. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions. Form corners and bases neatly.

D. Work tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerances allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or grout.

E. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

F. Keep expansion/contraction and control joints free of mortar or grout.

G. Install marble threshold where ceramic tile abuts different floor material.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean the completed tile work with type of cleaner recommended by tile manufacturer in accordance with published instructions.

B. Remove surplus grout. All grout haze must be removed from all tiles.

C. After tiles have been cleaned, polish tile with clean soft cloth.

3.4 PROTECTION FROM CONSTRUCTION DIRT

A. Apply to all clean, completed tile floors a protective coat of neutral cleaner solution mixed in accordance with tile manufacturer's instructions.





B. After cleaner solution has been applied, cover all tile floors with heavy duty non-staining construction paper, masked in place.

C. Just before final acceptable of tile work, remove paper and rinse the protective coating from all tile surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Seal joints and tile with sealer as recommended by Manufacturer.

B. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 7 days after installation.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Non-fire rated suspended exposed grid system, complete with lay-in acoustical ceiling panels.




A. Submit samples and product data for the following in accordance with Section 013300

1. Grid system: Indicate construction and finish for each type.

2. Ceiling panels: 12"x 12" minimum size for each type and finish.

3. Manufacturer's product data describing grid and ceiling panels.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Deliver one box of each type of ceiling panel, for maintenance use.

B. This additional tile shall be from the same lot as the tile installed and furnished in original boxes properly marked.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do not install grid system or panels until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust-generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, tested and approved.

B. Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.

C. Maintain uniform temperatures of minimum (61˚F) and humidity of 60% prior to, during and after installation.

D. Deliver acoustical tile and grid in manufacturer's original unopened packages, fully identified with type, finish, performance data and compliance labels. Handle and store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide 15-year warranty on suspended acoustical ceiling system (grid and panel) by manufacturer against sag in areas up to 100% humidity.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish ceiling systems with all accessories required to complete suspended ceiling grid system.

B. Maximum allowable deflection: 1/360.

C. Grid size: 24" x 24".

D. Ceiling grid and ceiling panels shall be by same manufacturer and installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and as contained herein.

2.2 PRE-FINISHED STEEL GRID SYSTEM

A. Type: Prefinished Non-fire-rated double web-exposed grid, all steel construction.

B. Finish: Baked on polyester paint.

C. Color: Platinum

D. Manufacturer's/Products

1. Armstrong Building Products, "Prelude Heavy-Duty System".

2. USG Interiors, Inc. "Donn Dx2 Heavy-Duty System".

3. Celotex

2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL

A. Mineral fiber Ceiling Panel: (Medium-high humidity)

1. Type: Non-directional fissured, medium textured.

a. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): minimum 33

b. Flame Spread: Class A

c. Edges: Square

d. Size: 24 X 24 X 5/8"

e. Color: White

2. Manufacturer's/Products

a. Armstrong Building Products, "Fine Fissured Item 1728" or prior approved equal.

b. Celotex, "Baroque".





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installer shall examine the conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

B. Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations to produce finished ceiling true-to-lines and levels and free of warped, soiled or damaged grid or panels.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members only. Supply hangers or inserts for installation to the respective section in ample time and with clear instructions for their correct placement. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required.

D. Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads with maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of 1/8" in 10'.

E. Install system after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work as required for proper installation. Ensure the layout of hangers and carrying channels are located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment, which are to be placed after the installation of ceiling grid systems.

F. Where mechanical, electrical, or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required distance.

G. Hang system independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes, and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members.

H. Do not support fixtures on main runners or cross runners, if weight of the fixture causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support the fixtures independently from structure above.

I. Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentrically loaded. Where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars.





J. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level. Miter corners.

1. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes.

2. Apply continuous bead of acoustical sealant on back of vertical leg before fastening to vertical surface. Do not expose sealant after installation complete.

K. Fit acoustic lay-in panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces.

L. Scribe and cut tile to fit accurately at edges of ceiling and around penetrations in the ceiling.

M. Provide ceiling grid at all sides of supply, return and exhaust grilles.

3.2 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system and replace any part which is damaged or faulty.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed surface of acoustical tile, and of trim, edge moldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instruction s for cleaning and ouch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

B. The installer shall advise the General Contractor of required protection for the acoustical tile ceiling, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA RESILIENT TILE FLOORING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare substrate surfaces for new floor finish.




A. Deliver materials to job in original, unopened containers with manufacturer's brand name clearly marked on all containers. Handle and store materials in original packages in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



1. Four full-size floor tiles and four 12" long samples of wall base for approval of colors and patterns.

2. Four copies of manufacturer's product data with samples.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Upon completion of work, deliver to the Owner two boxes of every color of floor tile for use in repairs and maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

A. Type: Formulated of pure vinyl resins and fillers; resistant to grease, alkali and dilute chemicals.

1. Uniform graining and color shall extend through entire tile thickness.

2. Subdued terrazzo style with harmonizing chip colors, evenly dispersed.

B. Size 12"x 12" x 1/8".


1. Armstrong, Lancaster, PA, "Standard Excelon Series, Imperial Texture"

2. Mannington Commercial, "Essentials"





2.2 RUBBER WALL BASE

A. Top set rubber cove base with reclining curvature at top with cove base, 1/8" gauge, 4" height. At exterior corners, base shall be one piece formed around corners with seams 8" minimum from corners.

1. Roll stock is required to minimize joints. Pre-cut 4' lengths not acceptable.

2. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.

B. Manufacturers/Products:

1. Flexco Co., Tuscumbia, Ala., "Set-on type Rubber Cove Base"

2. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, Oh., "Standard Toe Rubber Cove Base"

2.3 EDGE STRIPS

A. Type: Solid vinyl, round edges, same thickness as floor tile.

B. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.


1. Flexco "Tile Reducer Strip #92 for 1/8" tile"

2. Roppe "Reducer Strip #21 for 1/8" tile."

2.4 ACCESSORIES/ADHESIVES/SEALERS

A. Patching Material: Type recommended by resilient tile flooring manufacturer.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof with types recommended by resilient tile flooring manufacturer for specific material.

C. Sealer and Wax: Type recommended by resilient tile flooring material manufacturer for material type and location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION FOR FLOORING

A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'.

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 7% moisture content) and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization or dusting.

1. Perform testing as recommended by flooring manufacturer to ensure that substrate surfaces are properly prepared and ready to receive flooring.

2. Submit copies of test results to Architect.





C. Do not begin flooring installation if sub surfaces are excessively rough, wet, or otherwise unacceptable. Commencement of flooring installation indicates Contractor's acceptance of subsurface conditions.

D. Maintain minimum 70°F (21°C) air temperature at flooring installation area for 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

E. Store flooring and wall base materials in area of application. Allow 3 days for material to reach equal temperature as area before applying materials.

3.2 LEVELING

A. Remove ridges and bumps from subfloor. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with subfloor filler.

B. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE AND EDGE STRIPS

A. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area.

B. Clean the substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set.

C. Prevent soiling and staining of adjacent surfaces with adhesive.

D. Set floor tile in place and press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion.

E. Install with minimum tile width of 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter. Install to square grid pattern with all joints aligned and tight.

F. Terminate floor tile at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.

H. Scribe floor tile to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce a tight joint.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL BASE

A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.

B. At external corners, form base around corners with one piece of wall base with seams 8" minimum from corners. Joints at external corners are not acceptable.





C. Install on solid backing. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.

E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8" over 10'.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation.

3.6 MAINTENANCE IMMEDIATELY AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Allow at least 4 or 5 days for floor tiles to bond to the underlayment/subfloor before washing or scrubbing the floor.

B. Keep heavy furniture and equipment off the floor for al least 48 hours to allow the adhesive to set.

C. Sweep or vacuum thoroughly, and remove any residue.

D. When floor is thoroughly clean and dry, apply multiple coats (3-5 based on traffic use) of high quality cross-linked acrylic floor finish to protect the surface and build gloss. Allow sufficient drying time between coats.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA CARPETING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Carpeting, complete with required accessories.


A. Requirements for reference standard are defined in Section 014200.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300. Indicate the following:

1. Seam Layout

2. Type of Installation

3. Color or pattern

4. Pile or pattern direction

5. Location and type of edge moldings.

B. Submit samples and product data for the following in accordance with Section 013300:

1. 24"x 24" samples for each type and color of carpet specified.

2. 12" long samples of edge stripping.

3. Manufacturer's carpet specification.

4. Manufacturer's printed cleaning and maintenance recommendations.

1.4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit three copies of carpet manufacturer's instructions for the Owners care and maintenance of the carpet.

1.5 JOB ENVIRONMENT

A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work is complete and entire building is broom clean.

B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60˚F (15˚C) for at least 48 hours prior to installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained.






A. Subcontractor for this work shall be regularly engaged in the work and workmen shall be skilled mechanics. Subcontractor shall be approved as an installer by the carpet manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET

A. Carpet Type

1. Modular: 24" x 24"

2. Quarter turn or Brick Ashlar installation method

3. Secondary backing: Infinity Modular

4. Fiber: 100% Antron Legacy Type 6,6 Nylon


1. Mannington Commercial "Benchmark III" or approved equal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Concrete Cleaner: Type as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesive: Type as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

C. Tape: Seam tape heat bonding, 4" wide

D. Threshold Strips: Extruded aluminum.

1. Location: Where carpet adjoins different material having different finish elevation.


a. National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis, TN, "No. 417".

b. Pemko, Ventura, CA, "No. 174A".

E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Metal stripping shall be extruded aluminum. Other accessories as recommended by carpet manufacturer for a complete and secure carpet installation.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly dry. Moisture in slabs shall not exceed 65%. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10', non-cumulative.

C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity.

D. On concrete subfloor, clean surfaces as required and fill cracks, rough surfaces, and minor "Bird Baths" with approved latex patching compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal large patch areas.

E. Do not begin flooring installation if subsurface is unacceptable. Commencement of flooring installation indicates Contractor's acceptance of subsurface conditions.

3.2 SEAMS

A. Seams shall be kept to a minimum. Seams shall run length of space. Main traffic runs shall be parallel to seams.

B. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic, and in accordance with approved "seam layout".

C. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Insure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps.

D. Butted seams perpendicular to doorways are not acceptable.

E. In general, adjacent pieces shall have pile run the same direction. Unless otherwise shown, pile shall face the entrance.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Lay out rolls of carpet for Architect's approval.

B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots.

C. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed.





D. Install all carpet in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations and current installation manual of the Floor Covering Installation Contractors Association.

E. Vacuum the substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.

F. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.

G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.

H. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces.

I. Fit carpet, snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps.

J. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive is set.

K. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.

L. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full-length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.

3.4 DIRECT GLUE DOWN

A. Spread out carpet for 24 hours before installation. Trim edges before spreading adhesive.

B. Spread adhesive with notched trowel according to the manufacturer's recommendations. After sufficient open time, press carpet in adhesive with appropriate roller.

C. Butt edges together and apply a bead of seam adhesive to seam edges to prevent fraying and raveling. Apply seam adhesive along trimmed edges where face yarns enter the backing.

D. Roll carpet in both directions. Carpet with unitary back shall be rolled a second time. Carpet with attached cushion back shall be broomed rather than rolled.





3.5 CLEANING

A. After installation is complete, remove adhesive, grease, soil, etc. from carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum carpet and leave clean.

3.6 OVERSTOCK AND REMNANTS

A. Provide minimum of 10% overstock of each carpet color, to be used by Owner.

B. Package usable remnants, scrap and overage. Clearly identify on package areas where used. Deliver package to Owner.

3.7 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer's written warranty that carpet material is free from defects in dimensional stability, edge ravel, curling, cupping, and doming. Submit manufacturer's written warranty that surface wear shall not exceed 10% in 10 years.

B. Warrant the work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from, either defective or non-conforming materials, or workmanship.

C. Defects shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Wrinkling

2. Releasing from substrate

3. Staining from the contents of materials used in the installation if subjected to wetting.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PAINTING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare surfaces which are to receive finish.

B. Finish surfaces as specified in this section.

C. Touch up field welds on primed steel work.

D. Caulking as specified in this section.

1.2 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. Before any work is done, Architect will furnish Contractor with a set of color cards and schedule where various colors are to be applied. Contractor shall then prepare samples at job as required until colors and textures are satisfactory.

B. Upon completion of the painting work, the Contractor shall return the Color Schedule to the Architect complete with the manufacturer's formula for each scheduled color. The Architect will submit the color schedule to Owner to be used as information for maintenance paint.

C. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.3 MOCKUP

A. Before proceeding with paint application, finish one complete surface of each color scheme required, clearly indicating selected colors, finish texture, materials and workmanship.

B. If approved, sample area will serve as a minimum standard for work throughout the building.


A. Deliver paint materials in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.

B. Provide adequate storage facilities. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45°F in well ventilated area.





C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Ensure surface temperatures or the surrounding air temperature is in compliance with requirements of paint manufacturer.

B. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain the required temperatures before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes.

1.6 PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection.

B. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area.

C. Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.

E. Do not paint UL label on fire rated doors and frames. UL labels must remain visible after painting work is complete. The colored 'dot' on edge of fire rated doors are used by some manufacturers to identify the rating. Do not paint these colored dots.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise noted, all surfaces which will remain exposed to view (except factory finished items) shall receive field painting. Unless otherwise noted, factory primed items which will remain exposed to view shall receive field painting.

B. Paints shall have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

C. Architect shall not be restricted to a minimum number of colors (up to eight maximum) and reserves the right to specify custom mix for up to 25% of the paint colors used.






A. Coronado Paint CO, Edgewater, FL

B. Devoe and Raynolds CO, Louisville, KY

C. Glidden Coatings and Resins, Division of SCM Corporation, Cleveland, OH.

D. Benjamin Moore and CO, Montvale, N.J.

E. PPG Industries, PPG paints, Pittsburgh, PN

F. Pratt and Lambert (P&L), Memphis, TN

G. The Sherwin Williams Company (S-W), Cleveland, OH (Basis of Design)

H. Tnemec Company, Kansas City, MO

2.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous metal, semi gloss alkyd enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.

1. Prime coat: rust inhibitive primer. (Primer is not required on items delivered shop primed.)

a. Sherwin Williams: Kem Kromik Universial Primer B50Z series

2. First and second finish coats: semi-gloss alkyd enamel.

a. Sherwin Williams: DTM alkyd B55 Series

B. Zinc coated metal, high gloss alkyd enamel: 2 finish coats over primer

1. Prime coat: zinc dust-zinc oxide primer.

a. Sherwin Williams: Galvite HS Primer B50WZ30

2. First and second finish coats: high gloss alkyd enamel

a. Sherwin Williams: Industrial Urethane Enamel B54-150 Series

C. Aluminum, high gloss alkyd enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.

1. Prime coat: Latex Primer

a. Sherwin Williams: Pro-Cryl Primer B66-310 Series

2. First and second finish coats: High gloss alkyd enamel

a. Sherwin Williams: Pro Industrial Urethane Enamel B66-310

D. Cement Board Siding & Trim: 2 finish coats 100% acrylic latex

1. First and second coats:

a. Sherwin Williams A-100 Exterior Latex - Satin





E. Concrete (parking stripes): 2 coats

1. First coat, flat alkyd:

a. Sherwin Williams: ProMar Alkyd Traffic Marking B29 Series

F. Sealed Concrete: Clear Concrete Sealer (2 coats)

1. H & C Low VOC Concrete Sealer, Clear Gloss

2.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum drywall systems, odorless semi-gloss alkyd enamel finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.

1. First coat: Interior latex base primer coat.

a. Sherwin Williams: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer: B28W2600 Series

2. Second and third coats: Odorless interior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.

a. Sherwin Williams: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34w200 Series

B. Gypsum drywall systems, epoxy finish: Two finish coats over primer.

1. Prime coat: Latex

a. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer: B28W2600

2. First and second finish coats: acrylic epoxy

a. Sherwin Williams: Pro Industrial pre-catalyzed water based egshel epoxy K45-150 Series

C. Zinc coated metal, semi-gloss finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.

1. Prime coat: Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer coat

a. Sherwin Williams: Galvite HS Primer B50WZ30

2. Second coat: interior alkyd semi-gloss enamel..

a. Sherwin Williams: DTM Alkyd S/G: B55 Series

3. Third Coat: interior alkyd semi-gloss enamel.

a. Sherwin Williams: DTM Alkyd S/G: B55 Series

D. Painted woodwork and hardboard, semi-gloss enamel finish: 3 coats

1. First coat: Interior enamel undercoat.

a. Sherwin Williams: Premium Wall and Wood Primer B28W8111

2. Second and third coats: Odorless interior semi-gloss enamel.

a. Sherwin Williams: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series





E. Painted woodwork and hardboard, full gloss enamel finish: 3 coats.

1. First coat: interior enamel undercoat (FS TT-E-543).

a. Sherwin Williams: Premium Wall and Wood Primer B28W8111

2. Second and third coat: alkyd gloss enamel

a. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss B35-2200 Series

F. Woodwork, stained-varnish rubbed finish: 3 finish coats over stain plus filler on open grain wood.

1. Stain coat: interior oil stain .

a. Sherwin Williams: Wood Classics Interior oil stain A49 Series

2. Filler coat on open grain wood: paste wood filler . Wipe before first varnish coat.

a. Sherwin Williams: Sherwood Natural Filler D70T1

3. Second and third coats: oil rubbing varnish

a. Sherwin Williams: Wood Classics Satin Finish Varnish A66F390

G. Concrete floor sealer, water based finish (clear): (2 coats)

1. H & C Concrete Sealer Wet Look

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of work. Report in writing to Architect, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not commence until such defects have been corrected.

B. Correct defects and deficiencies in surfaces which may adversely affect work of this Section.

C. Contractor's commencement of painting indicates his acceptance of the surfaces to be painted as being acceptable for the finishes to be applied.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. Prepare all surfaces in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Instructions listed below are minimum guidelines. Contractor shall perform additional surface preparation based on

1. Particular surface or finish requirements

2. Particular job conditions





3. Contractor's expertise and experience in applying finishes.

C. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surfaces to dry completely.

D. Remove contamination from gypsum wallboard surfaces and prime to show defects if any. Paint after defects have been remedied.

E. Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized surfaces and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching type primer.

F. Remove surface contamination and oils from zinc coated surfaces and prepare for priming in accordance with metal manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Remove stains from concrete and concrete block surfaces caused by weathering of corroding metals.

1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder, oil, grease and other foreign matter from concrete and concrete block surfaces which are to be painted.

H. Fill hairline cracks, small holes and imperfections on plaster surfaces with patching plaster. Smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces where they occur.

I. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel and iron surfaces. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, sandblasting or any other necessary method. Ensure steel surfaces are satisfactory before paint finishing.

1. Clean unprimed steel surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime surfaces to indicate defects, if any. Paint after defects have been remedied.

2. Sand and scrape shop primed steel surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.

3.3 PAINT APPLICATION

A. The number of coats specified herein for various finishes is customarily sufficient to obtain satisfactory finish, but should such finish not be obtained, it shall be the responsibility of Contractor to apply such additional coats as may be required.

B. Apply each coat at proper consistency.

C. Sand wood lightly between coats, as required to achieve required finish.

D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry.





E. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer.

F. Where clear finishes are required, ensure tint fillers match wood. Work fillers well into the grain before set. Wipe excess from the surface.

3.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to mechanical and electrical sections with respect to identification banding of equipment. Identification banding and directional arrows are not part of the painter's work.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WALL & DOOR PROTECTION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Corner guards for wood stud/gypsum board partitions, complete with attachment devices and accessories.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 092600 - Gypsum Board Systems



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, size and types of fasteners, and accessories. Indicate finish type of all materials.

B. Submit manufacturer's product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface mounted, with polyvinyl chloride snap-on cover over continuous aluminum retainers and shock cushions.

B. Vinyl to have textured finish. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standards.

C. Vinyl thickness minimum 0.078". Aluminum sub-channel support thickness minimum .063".

D. Guards shall have 2-1/2" wings and shall be 48" tall.

E. Manufacturers:

1. Balco, Inc.

2. Construction Specialties, Inc.

3. Pawling

2.2 ACCESSORIES AND FASTENERS

A. Furnish all fasteners, retainers, and other accessories as required for complete and secure installation, and/or as recommended by manufacturer.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WALL & DOOR PROTECTION



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Install square, level and secure, accurately fitted and free from distortion and defects.

B. Install corner guards 48" above base.

C. Correct or replace any damaged or defective work.

D. Provide corner guards at all drywall outside corners.

E. Provide end wall guards at walls under 6" wide.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SIGNAGE



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install acrylic signage.

B. Furnish and install any signage required by Life Safety Code or ADA Guidelines.


A. Products and materials are to be provided from manufacturers and producers regularly engaged full-time in the manufacture or production of this and similar items, with a minimum 5-year history of successful manufacture and prior approved by the Architect.

B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with industry and trade standards normally associated with this product or material, except where specified product or material is superior in quality to industry and trade standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 014300 and as modified below. Indicate materials, thickness, overall dimensions, fasteners, and installation method.

B. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation for each type of sign required.

C. Furnish full-size layout of plaque.

D. Submit one full-size sample acrylic sign of type, style and color specified, including method of attachment. If approved the sample will become part of the job.

E. Furnish typical full-size layouts of each type of acrylic sign.

1. Provide listing of each sign indicating text and/or symbol.

2. Provide full size layout of each sign which contains a symbol.

F. Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication of any signage without Architect's written approval of layouts.

G. Manufacturer's standard 5-year warranty for acrylic/plastic signs interior or exterior mounted.


A. Deliver products and materials to the project and store in a safe, dry place with all shop supplied protection and labeling intact and legible until set, applied or installed.





B. In the event of damage, regardless of responsibility and capability, make repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the Owner, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACRYLIC SIGNS

A. Type: Wall mounted plaque signs, square corners.

B. Construction:

1. Material: 1/8" thick melamine plastic laminate, fire retardant and self extinguishing that meets U. S. government specification No. LP-387A, NDP. Rated for interior or exterior conditions.

2. Back Plate: Provide color match plastic back plate for any signs mounted on face on glass.

3. Tactile characters shall be raised 1/32" from sign face. Glue on letters or etched background not acceptable.

a. Letter form: sans serif upper case - 1-1/2" high minimum (match existing).

b. Size of numbers to be 1-1/2" minimum.

c. All text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Braille shall be separated 1/2" below the corresponding raised characters or symbols. Grade 2 Braille translation to be provided by signage manufacturer.

d. Copy position shall be centered.

e. Restroom signage: Accessibility symbol design W/C and universal "Male" or "Female" symbol shall be used and be accompanied with the verbal description placed directly below the symbol. Sign size: 8" X 6" minimum. Symbol size: 4".

f. Low level Exit Signs: Provide ADA approved signs at each exit.

C. Text: Per signage schedule at end of this Section and on Drawings.

D. Colors: Match existing.

1. Text: Light Beige

2. Background: Cafe

E. Mounting: Double faced adhesive vinyl tape, 1/32" thick, as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Manufacturers:

1. ASI-Modulex (Room ID signs) Match existing.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Do not install signage until all painting work in the immediate area has been completed. Do not install signage over painted surface which has not adequately dried.

B. Protect signage from damage by other trades.

3.2 ACRYLIC SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

A. Title Signs

1. Provide acrylic signs for text as indicated.

2. Text:

Quantity Text

1 Restroom

2 Staff Restroom

1 Nurse Station

1 Office

1 Lab

4 (1 - 4) Procedure Room

1 Staff Only

3 Exit



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Fire extinguishers

B. Fire extinguisher cabinets (match existing)

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's product data for all items specified as a part of this Section, in accordance with Section 014300.

B. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection details, size and type of fasteners and accessories. Indicate type of finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, DRY CHEMICAL TYPE (FE)

A. Type: Multi-purpose dry chemical, type ABC, 10 lb., with UL rating of 4A-60B:C. Noted on Drawings and elsewhere in this Section as type "FE".

B. Location: as shown on Drawings, and as specified with fire extinguisher cabinets specified in this Section.

C. Manufacturers/products

1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, MN, "No. MP10."

2. Modern Metal Products, Owatonna, MN, "Wing 10 HB"

3. Potter Roemer

4. J. L. Industries

5. Academy

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Semi recessed, with 2-1/2" rolled edge. Include one (1) fire extinguisher for each cabinet.

B. Extruded aluminum door and frame with matching continuous hinge and pin, with clear anodized finish.

C. Full glass door.

D. Match existing cabinets


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES



E. Manufacturers/products

1. Larsen, "Architectural Series, No. AL-2409-6R"

2. Modern Metal Products, "102(6)SR-3"

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all items in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and defects. Verify mounting height with architect.

C. Provide one (1) fire extinguisher and cabinet for each 2,000 sq. ft. or as required by code. If not identified on floor plan verify exact location with Architect in field.

3.2 CERTIFICATION

A. Fire extinguishers will bear certification meeting requirements of local fire department. Certification shall be dated within two weeks of date of Substantial Completion.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Installation of Owner furnished appliances and equipment as shown on Drawings and specified herein.

1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS


B. Division 22 - Plumbing

C. Division 23 - Mechanical

D. Division 26 - Electrical

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED ITEMS

A. Owner-furnished, Owner-installed items include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Washing machine

2. Clothes dryer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Examine the substrates and conditions under which the appliances are to be installed. Do not proceed if substrates and/or conditions are unacceptable for proper installation.

B. Coordinate rough-in and installation with Divisions 22 - 26.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and specifications.

B. Securely anchor to adjacent cabinets, walls, or floor, per manufacturer's requirements.

C. Ensure that operating parts work freely and fit neatly. Adjust hardware and catches as required.

D. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions or other damage affecting appearance or serviceability, as acceptable to the Architect.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT



3.3 CLOSE-OUT

A. Deliver operating manuals, parts list, Owner's manuals, spare parts and tools, etc., to the Architect.

B. Remove protective films, shipping supports, etc.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fixed modular laminate clad casework and components

B. Countertops.


A. Blocking within walls where indicated: Division 6.

B. Glass: Division 8.

C. Base molding: Division 9.

D. Sinks and service fixtures, service waste lines, connections, and vents: Division 22.

E. Electrical service fixtures: Division 26.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Identification of casework components and related products by surface visibility.

1. Open Interiors: Any open storage unit without solid door or drawer fronts, units with full glass insert doors and/or acrylic doors, and units with sliding solid doors.

2. Closed Interiors: Any closed storage unit behind solid door or drawer fronts.

3. Exposed Ends: Any storage unit exterior side surface that is visible after installation.

4. Other Exposed Surfaces: Faces of doors and drawers when closed, and tops of cabinets less than 72" above furnished floor.

5. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Interior surfaces which are visible, bottoms of wall cabinets and tops of cabinets 72" or more above finished floor.

6. Concealed Surfaces: Any surface not visible after installation.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years experience in providing manufactured casework systems for similar types of projects, produce evidence of financial stability, bonding capacity, and adequate facilities and personnel required to perform on this project.

B. Manufacturer: Provide products certified as meeting or exceeding ANSI-A 161.1-2000 testing standards.

C. Single Source Manufacturer: Casework, countertops and architectural millwork products must all be engineered and built by a single source manufacturer in order to ensure consistency and quality for these related products. Splitting casework,





countertops and/or architectural millwork between multiple manufacturers will not be permitted.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 013300, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog with specifications and construction details.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements.

1. Include section drawings of typical and special casework, work surfaces and accessories.

2. Indicate locations of plumbing and electrical service field connection by others.

3. Provide one set of shop drawings which includes all products within this section, engineered and built by a single source manufacturer, with seamless coordination amongst all products.

D. Casework Samples (To be available upon request):

1. Base cabinet: Cabinet conforming to specifications, with drawer and door.

2. Wall cabinet: Cabinet conforming to specifications, with door.

3. Cabinet samples shall be complete with specified hardware for doors, drawers and shelves.

4. Component samples: Two sets of samples for each of the following:

a. Decorative laminate color charts / PVC and ABS edgings.


A. Deliver completed laminate clad casework, countertops, and related products only after wet operations in building are completed, store in ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity range of 25 percent to 55 percent.

B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation with a protective covering.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install casework until permanent HVAC systems are operating and temperature and humidity have been stabilized for at least 1 week.

1. Manufacturer/Supplier shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for architectural casework installation areas.





2. After installation, control temperature and humidity to maintain relative humidity between 25% and 55%.

B. Conditions: Do not install casework until interior concrete work, masonry, plastering and other wet operations are complete.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. All materials and workmanship covered by this section will carry a five (5) year warranty from date of acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Core Materials

1. Particleboard up to 7/8" thick: Industrial Grade average 45-lb density particleboard, ANSI A 208.1-2009, M-2 requirements.

2. Particleboard 1" thick and thicker: Industrial Grade average 45-lb density particle-board, ANSI A 208.1-2009, M-2 requirements.

3. Medium Density Fiberboard 1/4" thick: Minimum average density 45-50 lbs., ANSI A208.2-2009 requirements.

4. MR Moisture Resistant Particleboard: Average 45-lb density particleboard, ANSI A208.1 1-2009, M-2 requirements.

B. Decorative Laminates: GREENGAURD Indoor Air Quality Certified

1. High-pressure decorative laminate VGS (.028), NEMA Test LD 3-2005.

2. High-pressure decorative laminate HGS (.048), NEMA Test LD 3-2005.

3. High-pressure decorative laminate HGP (.039), NEMA Test LD 3-2005.

4. High-pressure cabinet liner CLS (.020), NEMA Test LD 3-2005.

5. High-pressure backer BKH (.048), (.039), (.028), NEMA Test LD3-2005.

6. Thermally fused melamine TFM laminate, NEMA Test LD 3-2005. (TFM allowed on casework interiors only, as specified below. Utilization of TFM on any exterior casework surfaces, including door and drawer faces and finished ends, will not be permitted.)

C. Laminate Color Selection: Maximum 1 color per unit face and 5 colors per project.

D. Edging Materials:

1. 1mm PVC banding, machine applied.

2. 3mm PVC banding, machine applied and machine profiled to 1/8" radius.





E. Glass:

1. Wall unit full sliding glass doors: 1/4" thick laminated safety glass.

2. Glass insert doors, hinged wall cabinets: 1/4" thick laminated safety glass.

3. Trim glass inserts: Extruded rigid PVC channel and self-locking insert retainer strip.

2.2 SPECIALTY ITEMS

A. Support Members:

1. Countertop support brackets: Epoxy powder coated, 11 gauge steel with integral cleat mount opening and wire management opening.

2. Undercounter support frames: Epoxy powder coated.

3. Legs: Epoxy powder coated.

B. Tote Trays:

1. Heavy-duty vacuum-formed polypropylene plastic with full top rim and pull. Trays are ivory color, equipped with label holder.

2. Tote tray/supply cabinets equipped with injection molded polycarbonate; continuous side rail support glide. Each side rail support glide is adjustable with integral support pins to interface 32mm pre-drilled holes.

C. Computer Keyboard Tray:

1. Non-articulating, under counter mount with positive stop drawer slides.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE

A. Hinges:

1. Five knuckle, epoxy powder coated, institutional grade, 2-3/4" overlay type with hospital tip. 0.095" thick. ANSI-BHMA standard A156.9, Grade 1.

a. Doors 48" and over in height have 3 hinges per door.

b. Magnetic door catch with maximum 5-lb pull provided, attached with screws and slotted for adjustment.

B. Pulls:

1. Select from the TMI Vendor Stock Pull Program or other manufacturer’s pre-approved equivalent program.

2. Pull program offering must include minimum of 20 metal pull design and finish option combinations including:

a. Bar Pull (Finish options: Satin Bronzed Copper, Chrome Polished, Chrome Matte, and Brushed Nickel)

b. Bow Pull (Finish options: Black Matte, Oil Rubbed Bronze, Satin Bronzed Copper, Chrome Polished, Chrome Matte, and Nickel Matte)

c. Contemporary Pull (Finish option: Brushed Nickel)





d. Heavy Bow Pull (Finish option: Brushed Nickel)

e. Petite Bow Pull (Finish option: Brushed Nickel)

f. Metal Wire Pull (Finish options: Epoxy Powder Coated Gray, Beige, White, Black, Slate, Chrome, and Satin Chrome US26D)

3. All pulls with 96mm spacing on screws. Pull designs shall comply with the Americans with Disability Act (ADA).

C. Drawer Slides:

1. Regular, knee space and pencil: 100-lb load rated epoxy coated steel, bottom corner mounted with smooth and quiet nylon rollers. Positive stop both directions with self-closing feature. Paper storage, 150-lb load rated epoxy coated steel slides.

2. File: Full extension, 150-lb load rated epoxy coated steel, bottom corner mounted with smooth and quiet nylon rollers. Positive stop both directions with self-closing feature.

D. Adjustable Shelf Supports:

1. Injection molded transparent polycarbonate friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers, adjustable on 32mm centers. Each shelf support has 2 integral support pins, 5mm diameter, to interface pre-drilled holes, and to prevent accidental rotation of support. The support automatically adapts to 3/4" or 1" thick shelving and provides non-tip feature for shelving. Supports may be field fixed if desired. Structural load to 1200 lbs (300 lbs per support) without failure.

E. Locks:

1. Removable core, disc tumbler, cam style lock with strike. Lock for sliding 3/4" thick doors is a disc type plunger lock, sliding door type with strike. Lock for sliding glass/acrylic doors is a ratchet type sliding showcase lock.

2. Elbow catch or chain bolt used to secure inactive door on all locked cabinets.

F. File Suspension System: Extruded molding integral with top of drawer box sides to accept standard hanging file folders.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate casework, countertops and related products to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.

B. All casework panel components must go through a supplemental sizing process after cutting, producing a panel precisely finished in size and square to within 0.010", ensuring strict dimensional quality and structural integrity in the final fabricated product.





C. Cabinet Body Construction:

1. Tops and bottoms are glued and doweled to cabinet sides and internal cabinet components such as fixed horizontals, rails and verticals. Minimum 6 dowels each joint for 24" deep cabinets and a minimum of 4 dowels each joint for 12 inch deep cabinets. (Mechanical or metal hardware fasteners joining cabinet top and bottom panels to the sides will not be accepted.)

a. Tops, bottoms and sides of all cabinets are particleboard core.

2. Cabinet backs: 1/4" thick medium density fiberboard panel fully captured by the cabinet top, bottom and side panels. Finish to match cabinet interior. 3/4" x 4" particleboard rails will be placed behind the back panel at the top and bottom, and doweled to the sides utilizing 10mm hardwood fluted dowels. A third intermediate rail will be included on all cabinets taller than 56". Utilize hot melt glue to further secure back and increase overall strength.

a. Exposed back on fixed or movable cabinets: 3/4" thick particleboard with the exterior surface finished in VGS laminate as selected.

3. Fixed base and tall units have an individual factory-applied base, constructed of 3/4" thick plywood. Base is 102mm (nominal 4") high unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

4. Base units, except sink base units: Full sub-top glued and doweled to cabinet sides. (Mechanical or metal hardware fasteners joining cabinet sub-top panel to the sides will not be accepted.)

a. Sink base units are provided with open top and a stretcher at the front, attached to the sides. Back to be split removable access panel.

5. Side panels and vertical dividers shall receive adjustable shelf hardware at 32mm line boring centers. Mount door hinges, drawer slides and pull-out shelves in the line boring for consistent alignment.

6. Exposed and semi exposed edges.

a. Edging: 1mm PVC machine applied.

7. Adjustable Shelves in Cabinets

a. Core: Particleboard.

b. Core Thickness: 3/4" up to 30" wide, 1" over 30" wide.

c. Edge: 1mm PVC on Front Edge Only.

8. Interior finish, units with open Interiors:

a. Top, bottom, back, sides, horizontal and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faces with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine laminate.

9. Interior finish, units with closed Interiors:

a. Top, bottom, back, sides, horizontal and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faces with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine laminate.

10. Exposed ends:

a. Faced with high-pressure decorative VGS laminate. Use of TFM on exposed ends will not be permitted.





11. Wall unit bottom:

a. Faced with thermally fused melamine laminate.

12. Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished core stock surfaces, even on concealed surfaces (excluding edges), are not permitted.

D. Drawers:

1. Sides, back and sub front: Minimum 1/2" thick particleboard, laminated with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine doweled and glued into sides. Top edge banded with 1mm PVC.

2. Drawer bottom: Minimum 1/2" thick particleboard laminated with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine, screwed directly to the bottom edges of drawer box.

3. Paper storage drawers: Minimum 3/4" thick particleboard sides, back, and sub front laminated with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine. Minimum 1/2" thick particleboard drawer bottoms screwed directly to the bottom edges of the drawer box. Provide PVC angle retaining bar at the rear of the drawer.

E. Door/Drawer Fronts:

1. Core: 3/4" thick particleboard.

2. High-pressure decorative VGS laminate exterior, balanced with high-pressure cabinet liner CLS. Use of TFM on exterior or interior surfaces of door/drawer fronts will not be permitted.

3. Edges: 3mm PVC, machine applied, external edges and outside corners machine profiled to 1/8" radius.

4. Provide double doors in opening in excess of 24" wide.

F. Miscellaneous Shelving (not in Cabinets):

1. Core material: 1" thick particleboard.

2. High-pressure decorative VGS laminate on both faces.

3. Edges: 3mm PVC, external edges and outside corners machine profiled to 1/8" radius.

2.5 DECORATIVE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Core:

1. All countertops except at sink elevations: 1-1/8" thick ANSI A208.1-1993 M-2 particleboard.

2. Countertops at sink elevations: 1-1/8" thick ANSI A208.1-1993 M-3 moisture resistant (MR) particleboard.

B. Surface: High-pressure decorative HGS/HGP laminate with balanced backer sheeting.

C. Edges, including applied backsplash: 3mm PVC, exposed edges and corners machine profiled to 1/8" radius.





D. All countertops joints must be dry fit at the factory to check for consistency in color from one panel to the other and overall finished panel thickness, resulting in a high quality product easy to install.

2.6 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Brian Hebert Woodworks

2. Cabinets and Tops

3. Cabinets by Design, Inc.

4. Casesystems

5. Custom Cabinets by Monty Augustine

6. Gulf Coast Woodwork

7. Hanley Gremillion Millwork & Supply, Inc.

8. Insight, Inc.

9. LSI

10. Louisiana Cabinets

11. Sidcor

12. Specialty Millwork of Casework

13. Tippens Specialty Millwork

14. TMI

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. The casework contractor must examine the job site and the conditions under which the work under this section is to be performed, and notify the building owner in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work under this Section until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Erect casework, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required. Where laminate clad casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut to accurate fit.





B. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind.

C. Repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove and dispose of all packing materials and related construction debris.

B. Clean cabinets inside and out. Wipe off fingerprints, pencil marks, and surface soil etc., in preparation for final cleaning by the building owner.

3.5 COLOR SELECTION

A. Laminate Color Selection:

1. Select from the full range of standard Wilsonart® and Formica® stock color charts.

2. Thermally fused melamine laminate matched to White color.

B. Hardware Color Selection:

1. Hinge: Select from your choice of epoxy powder coating stock colors matched to White, Beige, Gray, Black, Slate and Chrome.

2. Pulls: Select from design specific finish options available in the TMI Vendor Stock Pull Program.

3. Miscellaneous Hardware (support brackets, metal components, etc.): Select from your choice of epoxy powder coating stock colors matched to White, Beige, Gray, Black, Slate and Chrome.

C. PVC Edge Banding Color Selection:

1. 3mm PVC: Select from your choice of stock colors matched to White, Beige, Gray, Black and Slate. Other colors are available. Special order colors may impact cost and lead times.

2. 1mm PVC: Select from your choice of stock colors matched to White, Beige, Gray, Black and Slate. Other colors are available. Special order colors may impact cost and lead times.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WINDOW TREATMENTS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install 2" wood window blinds where scheduled on drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature shall be submitted, indicating materials, finishes, construction, and installation instructions and verifying that product meets requirements specified. Manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance and cleaning shall be included.

B. Sample: One full-size shade of each type specified in this contract shall be supplied for approval by the responsible contracting officer or agent. The supplied units shall be furnished complete with all required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions, and warranty.


A. Supplier: The manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products specified, and to honor any claims against the product presented in accordance with the warranty.

B. Installer: The installer or agent shall be qualified to install the specified products by prior experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of any requirement of manufacturer or any subsidiary or licensed agent. The installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation.


A. Product shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer's original packaging.

B. Produce shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes, and operating mechanisms.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed.

B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60˚F and 90˚F during and after installation; relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Blinds shall have a lifetime warranty.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WINDOW TREATMENTS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED PROVIDER/INSTALLER

A. Budget Blinds, Lake Charles

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces, installation conditions and field measurement for this work.

B. Other interacting trades shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall comply with manufacturer's standards and procedures as detailed on contract drawings.

B. Adequate clearance shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware.

C. Clean finished installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work clean and free of debris.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of theContract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions) and Division0 as appropriate, apply to the Work specified in this Section.

B. Refer to all Sections, as well as the Specifications for the other various trades andmaterials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding all work.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor and material necessary to provide and install the completeplumbing portion of this Contract as called for herein and on accompanyingdrawings. Parts of the plumbing division may be bid separately or in combination,at the Contractor's option; however, it shall be the responsibility of the GeneralContractor to assure himself that all items covered in the Plumbing Division havebeen included if he chooses to accept separate bids.

B. It is the intent of this specification that all materials with temperatures below ambientconditions or conveying any fluid/gas at temperatures below 70 deg. F be insulatedto completely eliminate the potential for condensation. Unless specified elsewherein these specifications, for materials that do not require access, insulate with 2"thick 3/4# density fiberglass duct wrap insulation with foil face (seal all joints air andwater tight). For materials requiring occasional access, use 2" thick closed cellrubberized insulation with re-sealable fabric joints (hook and loop type).

C. Contractor shall refer to the Architectural and Structural drawings and installequipment, piping, etc. to meet building and space requirements. No equipmentshall be bid on or submitted for approval if it will not fit in the space provided.

D. It is the intention of these specifications that all plumbing systems shall be furnishedcomplete with all necessary valves, controls, insulation, piping devices, equipment,etc. necessary to provide a satisfactory installation that is complete and in goodworking order.

E. Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself thoroughly with all existingfacilities and conditions which would affect his portion of the work. Failure to do soshall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of installing his work to meetthe conditions.





F. This Contractor shall protect the entire system and all parts thereof from injurythroughout the project and up to acceptance of the work. Failure to do so shall besufficient cause for the Architect to reject any piece of equipment.

1.3 DEMOLITION

A. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid to determine the extent of workrequired to complete the project.

B. Contractor shall coordinate demolition with owner. All equipment shall be salvagedfor owner. Locate equipment as directed by owner. All equipment and materialsnot salvaged by the owner shall be removed from the site and discarded at thecontractors expense.

C. Contractor shall coordinate all work with general contractor and phase work asrequired by project.

D. All equipment piping, etc. required to be removed to accommodate themodifications shall be removed.

E. Contractor shall maintain services to existing facilities which shall remain during andafter construction is complete.

F. Contractor shall coordinate any shutdown of services with the owner. It is intendedthat the building will remain occupied during construction. Contractor shall scheduleshut down of services with the owner in order to prevent disruption of buildingoccupancy.

G. Contractor shall be responsible for draining down of existing systems to completedemolition. All work shall be scheduled with the owner. Contractor shall also beresponsible for refilling system and removing all air in order to return the systemsto proper operating conditions.

H. All shutdown of services shall be done at night during a time period approved byowner. The systems shall be required to be back up and running each morningunless otherwise approved by the owner.

1.4 GROUNDS AND CHASES

A. This Contractor shall see that all required chases, grounds, holes and accessoriesnecessary for the installation of his work are properly built in as the workprogresses; otherwise, he shall bear the cost of providing them.





1.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Initial cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor, withthe Mechanical Contractor being responsible for laying out and marking any and allholes required for the reception of his work. No structural beams or joists shall becut or thimbled without first receiving the approval of the Architect. After initialsurfacing has been done, any further cutting, patching and painting shall be doneat this Contractor's expense.

1.6 FILL AND CHARGES FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Fill and charge with materials or chemicals all those devices or equipment asrequired to comply with the manufacturer's guarantee or as required for properoperation of the equipment.

1.7 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Prime bidder is responsible for all work , of all trades and sub-contractors biddingthis project. It is the prime bidders responsibility, prior to submitting a bid to ensurethat sub-contractors coordinate all aspects of the work between trades, sub-contractors, etc. to the fullest extent possible.

B. Prime bidder shall ensure that all sub-contractors, suppliers, equipment vendors,etc., obtain all necessary and pertinent contract document information pertaining totheir work prior to the submission of a bid. Contractor shall realize that differentsub-contractors may furnish equipment, accessories, devices, etc. necessary for acomplete and working installation, that require provision of services by another sub-contractor or trade.

C. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division are required to review allcontract documents including but not limited to Architectural drawings, Structuraldrawings, Mechanical drawings, Plumbing drawings, Electrical drawings, etc. tocoordinate requirements and responsibilities with and through prime bidder.

D. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by furnishing a bid on aportion of the prime contract are indicating that they have received all contractdocuments and coordinated services provided under their portion of the work withthe prime bidder; they are indicating that they have expressed any pertinentquestions (which would result from a detailed, thorough review of the entire set ofcontract documents) to the prime bidder in accordance with Division 0 & 01requirements, prior to bidding.

E. All timely, pertinent, questions provided in writing prior to bids, in accordance withDivision 0 & 01 requirements, will be clarified, defined, or otherwise explained in a





written addendum and/or addendums prior to bids, in accordance in Division 0 & 01requirements.

F. It is not the intention of these contract documents to leave any issue relating tocoordination between trades or sub-contractors vaguely defined. The intention isto define all issues, coordination matters, equipment requirements, sizes, routing,etc. to the satisfaction of the prime bidder, prior to receipt of bids.

G. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by virtue of the submissionof a bid to the prime bidder, are indicating that they have reviewed the entire set ofcontract documents with due diligence and regard for the Owner's desire for acomprehensive and complete bid proposal; that they have expressed all concernsor questions requiring clarification on matters of coordination between trades and/orsub-contractors; that they have expressed any such concerns or questions in writingin accordance with Division 0 & 01 requirements.

H. Prime bidders, by submission of a comprehensive bid on the project are indicatingthat the subcontractors selected in their bid have complied with all Division 0 & 01requirements, that they have indicated in writing, prior to bidding, all questions orconcerns requiring clarification and/or explanation and have documented any andall specific exclusions involving work that would generally be considered to be workof their trade. The prime bidder shall coordinate all work so that anything excludedby the bidder of all or any portions of this section or division, have been addressedprior to bids in one of the following manners:

1. The work has been confirmed, by the prime bidder, to be work of anothertrade or subcontractor (whose proposal is also being accepted).

2. Clarification of the matter has been made through the prime designprofessional via written addendum and is clearly and mutually understoodby the prime bidder and the party raising the issue/question, or seekingclarification.

3. The work has been accepted as the responsibility of the prime contractordirectly.

1.8 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. The term "provide" when used in the Contract Documents includes all itemsnecessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

B. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material,fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, shall beinterpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed aslimiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use anyarticle, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in thejudgement of the Architect expressed in writing is equal to that specified.





C. Coordinate and properly relate all Work of this Division to building structure andwork of all other trades.

D. Visit premises and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions; verify alldimensions in field. Advise Architect of any discrepancies prior to Bid Date inaccordance with Division 0.

E. Do not rough-in for any item or equipment furnished by others or noted "Not inContract" (NIC), without first receiving rough-in information from physicallyexamining the existing equipment, receiving specific cut sheet information from theOwner’s representative, other trades and/or Architect. Rough-in services for “NIC”equipment as required, as the work progresses.

F. Provide storage and protection for all equipment and materials in accordance withrequirements of Division 0 & 01. Replace any equipment and materials damagedby improper handling, storage, or protection, at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Keep premises clean in accordance with requirements of Division 0 & 01.

1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions are only allowed by approval of the Architect prior to Bid Date asstipulated in Division 0 and/or Division 0 & 01.

B. Design of systems is based on specific equipment. If the use of othermanufacturer's equipment, even though approved by Architect, involves additionalcost due to space requirements, foundation requirements, increased mechanical orelectrical services, the cost of such extra work shall be borne by manufacturer ofsubstituted equipment. Even though a manufacturer's name appears in theContract Documents as having acceptable equipment, their equipment with differentmodel numbers shall be classified as being a substitute to the equipment originallydesigned for and named in the Contract Documents. Substitute equipment,materials, etc., will not be allowed to deviate from Contract Document requirements. Furnish all options specified or reasonably implied from the contract documents. Specifically identify any variance is regard to submittal versus specifiedperformance on the cover sheet of each submittal.

1.10 VALUE ENGINEERING (V/E):

A. While it may be in the project Owner’s interest to consider the first cost moneysaving that may be generated via alternatives and options generated viaparticipation in Value Engineering, Division 22 contractor shall realize thatsubstantive offers of Value Engineering (V/E), if accepted by the Owner, constitutea design-build agreement (offer and acceptance) with the owner, and drasticallychange the design concept of the project, as developed by the Professional ofRecord identified on the Contract Documents.





B. Should contractor offer, and the owner accept value engineering options that alteraspects of the system design, equipment, performance and/or performanceverification or monitoring of respective systems, Division 22 contractor shall provideduly licensed professional engineering consultants working on behalf of the Division22 contractor (including sub-contractors and equipment vendors/manufacturers) toreview, approve and take professional responsibility for performance and suitabilityof V/E hybrid systems, materials or operational changes related to respective V/Eitems. The Division 22 contractor’s licensed professional engineering consultantsand the Division 22 contractor assume any and all responsibility for the design andsuitability in terms of performance, of hybrid systems installed, as Division 22contractor’s Professional of Record, absolving the original project Professional ofRecord (identified on the original Contract Documents, released for the originalproject Bid/Negotiation) from responsibility for the V/E hybrid systems portion of thework.

C. Division 22 contractor, via the offer and acceptance of value engineering items onthe project agrees to provide professional engineering design services and take fulland complete responsibility for the hybrid design. Further, the Division 22contractor’s (V/E Items) professional of record (either employees, or independentconsultants to the Division 22 contractor) through the offer and acceptance of V/Eitems, agree to indemnify and hold harmless the project owner, the owner’s originalA/E team (Professional of Record on behalf of the owner for the original ContractDocuments) their heirs and assigns in regard to the V/E changes and their impacton the Division 22 systems altered, affected or modified, in whole or in part. TheProfessional of Record shown on the original Contract Documents in regard to thesystems altered, adjusted, revised, modified or otherwise affected by the valueengineering items implemented, shall be absolved of design responsibility as aresult of implementation of V/E items, and their original use of Engineering Sealsused for original Contract Documents, shall not apply.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The specific intent of these Contract Documents is to provide the various systems,equipment, etc. to the Owner complete and in a thoroughly calibrated functionalcondition.

B. The Drawings shall not be construed as shop drawings. In the event of a possibleinterference with piping or equipment of another trade, items requiring set gradeand elevations shall have precedence over other items Should any majorinterference develop, immediately notify the Architect.

C. In laying out Work, refer to mechanical, electrical, structural, and architecturaldrawings at all times in order to avoid interference and undue delays in the progressof the Work.





1.12 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. Work shall be in full accord with the most stringent interpretation of the StateSanitary Code, local ordinances, building codes, and other applicable national, local,and state regulations.

B. Equipment shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the Nationalbureau of Fire Underwriters and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

C. Items provided under this Division shall comply with the American NationalStandards Institute (ANSI) "Specifications for Making Buildings and FacilitiesAccessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People," ANSI A 117.1

D. In the possible event of conflict between codes or regulations and ContractDocuments, the most stringent interpretation of either shall govern (provided ifexceeds the requirements of other codes. In the event of an irreconcilabledifference between codes or regulations notify the Architect/Engineer immediately.

E. In addition to the codes heretofore mentioned, all mechanical work and equipmentshall conform to the applicable portions of the following specifications, codes and/orregulations:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC)2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)4. American Gas Association(AGA)5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

F. All materials, equipment and accessories installed under this Contract shall conformto all rules, codes, etc. as recommended by National Associations governing themanufacturer, rating and testing of such materials, equipment and accessories. Allmaterials shall be new and of the best quality and first class in every respect. Whenever directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit a sample forapproval before proceeding.

G. Where laws or local regulations provide that certain accessories such as gauges,thermometers, relief valves and parts be installed on equipment, it shall beunderstood that such equipment be furnished complete with the necessaryaccessories, whether or not called for in these Specifications.

H. All unfired and fired pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the A.S.M.E.Code and so stamped. Furnish shop certificates for each vessel. Contractor shallprovide and pay for first operating certificate as per State Fire Marshal Regulations.





1.13 FEES, PERMITS, AND TAXES

A. Obtain and pay for permits required for the Work of this Division. Pay fees inconnection therewith, including necessary inspection fees.

B. Pay any and taxes levied for Work of this Division, including municipal and/or statesales tax where applicable.

C. All permits, fees, certificates, etc. for the installation, inspections, plan review,service connections locations, and/or construction of the work which are requiredby any authority and/or agencies having jurisdiction, shall be obtained and paid forby the Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall make all tests required by the Architect, Engineer or othergoverning authorities at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and local governing authorities before anytests are made, and the tests are not to be drawn off a line covered or insulateduntil examined

and approved by the authorities. In event defects are found, these shall becorrected and the work shall be retested.

F. Prior to requesting final inspection by the Architect, the Contractor shall have acomplete coordination and adjustment meeting of all of his sub-contractors directlyresponsible for the operation of any portion of the system. At the time of thismeeting, each and every sequence of operation shall be checked to assure properoperation. Notify the Architect in writing ten (10) days prior to this meeting,instructing him of the time, date and whom you are requesting to be present.

G. This project shall not be accepted until the above provisions are met to thesatisfaction of the Architect.

1.14 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Install and operate equipment and material in strict accord with manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions. The manufacturer's instructions shall becomepart of the Contract Documents and shall supplement Drawings and Specifications.

1.15 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Submit shop drawings, project data, and samples in accordance with requirementsof Division 0/and or Division 0 & 01.

B. Shop drawings shall consist of published ratings or capacity data, detailedconstruction drawings for fabricated items, wiring and control diagrams,





performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings,and other pertinent data. Submit drawings showing revisions to equipment layoutsdue to use of alternate or substitute equipment.

C. Where approved manufacturers and suppliers of equipment, materials, etc. areunable to fully comply with Contract Document requirements, specifically call suchdeviations to attention of Architect on submittals. Type deviations on a separatesheet; underlined statements or notations on standard brochures, equipment flysheets, etc. will not be accepted.

D. Approval of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing requiredquantities and verifying dimensions. In addition, approval shall not waive originalintent of Contract Documents.

E. Failure to obtain written approval of equipment shall be considered sufficientgrounds for rejection of said equipment regardless of the stage of completion of theproject.

1.16 REVIEW OF MATERIALS:

A. Whenever manufacturers or trade names are mentioned in these Plans orSpecifications, the words "or approved equivalent" shall be assumed to followwhether or not so stated. Manufacturers or trade names are used to establish astandard of quality only, and should not be construed to infer a preference. Equivalent products which meet the Architect's approval will be accepted; however,these products must be submitted to the Architect a minimum of ten (10) days priorto the Bid Date.

B. Submission shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, rating table andconstruction features.

C. Upon receipt and checking of this submittal, the Architect will issue an addendumlisting items which are approved as equivalent to those specified. THECONTRACTOR SHALL BASE HIS BID SOLELY ON THOSE ITEMS SPECIFIEDOR INCLUDED IN THE "PRIOR APPROVAL ADDENDUM", AS NO OTHER ITEMWILL BE ACCEPTABLE.

D. Prior approval of a particular piece of equipment does not mean automatic finalacceptance and will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of assuringhimself that this equipment is in complete accord with the Plans and Specificationsand that it will fit into the space provided. Shop drawings must be submitted on allitems of equipment for approval as hereinafter specified.

E. Before proceeding with work and/or within thirty (30) days after the award of theGeneral Contract for this work, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the





Architect complete shop and working drawings of such apparatus, equipment,controls, insulation, etc. to be provided in this project. These drawings shall givedimensions, weights, mounting data, performance curves and other pertinentinformation.

F. The Architect's approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from theresponsibility of incorrectly figured dimensions or any other errors which may becontained in these drawings. Any omission from the shop drawings orspecifications, even through approved by the Architect, shall not relieve theContractor from furnishing and erecting same.

G. Seven (7) sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. These submittals shall be supplied as part of this Contractor's contract. Anydrawings not approved shall be resubmitted until they are approved. SUBMIT ALLSHOP DRAWINGS AT THE SAME TIME. NO SEPARATE ITEMS WILL BEACCEPTED.

H. Submit one (1) sepia with two (2) blueline prints of all mechanical room layoutsshowing locations of all equipment, piping, etc. to insure all will fit in space provided. Submit drawings at 1/4" scale.

1.17 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Keep Project Record Documents in accordance with requirements of Division 0 &01.

B. During construction period, keep accurate records of installations made under thisDivision, paying particular attention to major interior and exterior underground andconcealed piping, ductwork, etc.

C. The Contractor shall obtain at his cost, two sets of blueline prints of the original biddocuments by the Architect. One set shall be kept on the site with all informationas referenced below, and shall update same as the work progresses. The other setwill be utilized to record all field changes to a permanent record copy for the Owner.

D. If the Contractor elects to vary from the Contract Documents and secures priorapproval from the Architect for any phase of the work, he shall record in a neat and

readable manner, ALL such variances on the blueline print in red. The originalbluelines shall be returned to the Architect for documentation.

E. All deviations from sizes, locations, and from all other features of the installationsshown in the Contract Documents shall be recorded.

F. In addition, it shall be possible using these drawings to correctly and easily locate,identify and establish sizes of all piping, directions and the like, as well as other





features of the work which will be concealed underground and/or in the finishedbuilding.

G. Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to columns, linesor walls, locating all turns, etc., and by properly referenced centerline or invertelevations and rates of fall.

H. For work concealed in the building, sufficient information shall be given so it can belocated with reasonable accuracy and ease. In some cases this may be bydimension. In others, it may be sufficient to illustrate the work on the drawings inrelation to the spaces in the building near which it was actually installed. TheArchitect's/Engineer's decision in this matter will be final.

I. The following requirements apply to all "As-Built" drawings:

1. They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense.2. All such drawings shall be done carefully and neatly, and in a form approved

by the Architect/Engineer.3. Additional drawings shall be provided as necessary for clarifications.4. These drawings shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work

and shall be available upon request for examination by theArchitect/Engineer; and when necessary, to establish clearances for otherparts of the work.

5. "As-built" drawings shall be returned to the Architect upon completion of thework and are subject to approval of the Architect/Engineer.

1.18 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Provide excavating and backfilling necessary for Work of this Division. Comply withprovisions of Division 2, Site Work, if applicable.

B. Trenches shall be inspected by Code Authorities and/or Owner's Representativebefore and after piping is laid. Give Owner' Representative 24-hour notice for eachinspection. If any trenches are filled without Owner's Representative inspection andas subsequently found to be deficient, the trenches shall be uncovered, inspected,and then re-filled, if requested by Owner's Representative.

C. Provide minimum 18 inches of cover or in compliance with local published frost linedata (if greater than 18 inches) to finish grades or paving at water piping.

D. For piping, provide bell holes at trench bottom to assure uniform bearing. Accuratelygrade trench bottoms by instrument before laying any pipe.

E. Protect and maintain trenches in dry condition until piping has been inspected andapproved. Immediately after approval, backfill trenches in tamped layers.





F. Compact fill to satisfaction of Architect and/or Owner's Representative.


A. Comply with requirements of Division 0 and Division 0 & 01 regarding cutting andpatching. Locate and timely install sleeves as required to minimize cutting andpatching.

B. Cutting, fitting, repairing, patching, and finishing of Work shall be done by craftsmenskilled in their respective trades. Where cutting is required, cut in such a manner asnot to weaken structure, partitions, or floors. Holes required to be cut must be cutor drilled without breaking out around the holes. Where patching is necessary infinished areas of the building, the Architect will determine the extent of suchpatching and refinishing.

C. Repairing Roadways and Walks: Coordinate all roadway work with authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Cut and/or bore under roadways for connection of utilities asrequired. Coordinate work through General Contractor. Where this contractor cutsor breaks roadways or walks to lay the piping, he shall repair or replace thesesections to match existing, unless specifically identified as the responsibility ofothers.

1.20 PAINTING

A. Painting shall be provided by General Contractor’s painting sub-contractor, unlessspecified otherwise. Leave exposed piping, materials, and equipment clean and freeof rust, grease, dirt, etc. before and after painting.

B. Factory finished equipment, fixtures, and materials which are marred, chipped,scratched, or otherwise unacceptable shall be repaired or replaced under thisDivision to Architect satisfaction, at no additions cost to Owner.

C. Coordinate all painting requirements with prime bidder prior to bids.

D. Paint all exposed piping inside and outside of building. Label all piping afterpainting as required. Utilize industry standard paint colors for respective systemunless directed otherwise by Architect. Review proposed color scheme withArchitect/Engineer prior to ordering materials.

E. All piping shall be color coded per the following:

1. Domestic Cold Water Piping Yellow2. Domestic Hot Water Piping Blue





1.21 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:

A. Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall clean and adjust all equipment,controls, valves, etc.; clean all piping, ductwork, etc.; and leave the entireinstallation in good working order.

1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide the Owner with three (3) copies of printed instructions indicating variouspieces of equipment by name and model number, complete with parts lists,maintenance and repair instructions and test and balance report.

COPIES OF SHOP DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE AS OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.

B. This information shall be bound in plastic hardbound notebooks with the job name,Architect and Engineer names permanently embossed on the cover. Rigid boarddividers with labeled tabs shall be provided for different pieces of equipment. Submit manuals to the Architect for approval.

C. In addition to the operation and maintenance brochure, the Contractor shall providea separate brochure which shall include registered warranty certificates on allequipment, especially any pieces of equipment which carry warranties exceedingone (1) year.

D. The operation and maintenance brochure shall be furnished with a detailed list ofall equipment furnished to the project, including the serial number and all pertinentnameplate data such as voltage, amperage draw, recommended fuse size, rpm,etc. The Contractor shall include this data on each piece of equipment furnishedunder this contract.

1.23 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for aperiod of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the project. Thisguarantee shall include furnishing of all labor and material necessary to make anyrepairs, adjustments or replacement of any equipment, parts, etc. necessary torestore the project to first class condition. This guarantee shall exclude only thechanging or cleaning of filters. Warranties exceeding one (1) year are hereinafterspecified with individual pieces of equipment.

B. If the Contractor's office is in excess of a fifty (50) mile radius of the project, he shallappoint a local qualified contractor to perform any emergency repairs or





adjustments required during the guarantee period. The name of the contractorappointed to provide emergency services shall be submitted to the Architect for hisapproval.

1.24 LOCAL CONDITIONS

A. The location and elevation of all utility services is based on available surveys andutility maps and are reasonably accurate; however, these shall serve as a generalguide only, and the Contractor shall visit the site and verify the location andelevation of all services to his satisfaction in order to determine the amount of workrequired for the execution of the Contract.

B. The Contractor shall contact the various utility companies, determine the extent oftheir requirements and he shall include in his bid all lawful fees and paymentsrequired by these companies for complete connection and services to the building,including meters, connection charges, street patching, extensions from meters tomain, etc.

C. In case major changes are required, this fact, together with the reasons therefor,shall be submitted to the Architect, in writing, not less than seven (7) days beforethe date of bidding. Failure to comply with this requirement will make the Contractorliable for any changes, additions and expenses necessary for the successfulcompletion of the project.

1.25 MINOR DEVIATIONS

A. Plans and detail sketches are submitted to limit, explain and define conditions,specified requirements, pipe sizes and manner of erecting work. Structural or otherconditions may require certain modifications from the manner of installation shown,and such deviations are permissible and shall be made as required. However,specified sizes and requirements necessary for satisfactory operation shall remainunchanged. It may be necessary to shift ducts or pipes, or to change the shape ofducts, and these changes shall be made as required. All such changes shall bereferred to the Architect for approval before proceeding. Extra charges shall not beallowed for these changes.

B. The Contractor shall realize that the drawings could delve into every step, sequenceor operation necessary for the completion of the project, without drawing on theContractor's experience or ingenuity. However, only typical details are shown onthe Plans. In cases where the Contractor is not certain about the method ofinstallation of his work, he shall ask for details. Lack of details will not be an excusefor improper installation.





C. In general, the drawings are diagrammatic and the Contractor shall install his workin a manner so that interferences between the various trades are avoided. In caseswhere interferences do occur, the Architect is to state which item was first installed.

1.26 VALVE TAGS

A. Secure metal tags to all valves. Labeling on all valve tags shall include type ofsystem the valve controls and the area of building, zone, or equipment numberaffected by valve operation. Tag shall be 2"minimum diameter brass, engraved withcode number, service and size. A framed list of the valves, giving manufacturer'sname, model number, type and location shall be mounted in the main basementequipment room.

1.27 LABELING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment furnished under Division 0 & 01of contract documents shall belabeled with permanent laminated plate secured to equipment. Units shall belabeled as indicated on plans and schedules.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SANITARY SEWER AND SANITARY VENT PIPE

A. Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Lines and fittings: These shall beSchedule 40 plastic PVC sewer pipe and fittings with solvent joints.

B. Sanitary sewer pipe penetrating concrete slabs shall be wrapped with VirginiaChemical K-501 or equal foam insulation tape.

C. Provide tracer wire for all PVC piping below grade.

1.2 DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER LINES

A. All such lines shall be Government Type "L", hard copper water tubing ofstandard weight and thickness as made by Mueller, Chase, Anaconda orequivalent, unless indicted otherwise. Use 95-5 solder on all piping above slab. Use Silfos 1000o solder on all piping beneath the slab.

B. Domestic water lines shall be insulated at all penetrations through slab perinsulation.

1.3 WATER HEATER RELIEF LINES, EQUIPMENT DRAIN LINES, REFRIGERANT LINES

A. Refrigerant lines these shall be Government Type "L" hard copper.

B. Equipment Emergency Drain Pan Lines and Condensate Drain Lines: Theseshall be Government Type "L" hard copper.

1.4 TRAP PRIMER LINES

A. All such lines shall be Type "L" soft copper, without joints.

1.5 PIPE SPECIALTIES

A. Dielectric unions shall be used between copper and iron pipe.

1.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required forhis equipment unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.





B. This Contractor shall furnish and install all escutcheons, inserts, thimbles,hangers, etc. required for the proper support and installation of his equipmentand piping and he shall cooperate with other trades in locating and placing theseitems.

1.7 PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR ALL PIPES PASSING THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS,

BEAMS, ETC.

A. Sleeves passing through structural members or concrete footings shall be of castiron or Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves passing through nonstructural walls orfloors shall be of 26 gauge galvanized iron. Joints between sleeves and pipespassing through floors shall be made weather tight with plastic materials. Wherepipes pass through water proofing membrane, flashing sleeves shall be installed.

B. Provide Grinnel, Fee & Mason, or equivalent malleable iron split ring hangerswith rod supports throughout. STRAP HANGERS OR WIRE WILL NOT BEACCEPTED.

C. Maximum spacing of hangers for cast iron pipes shall be 5 ft.; for other than soil,use 10 ft.

D. Provide galvanized iron shields between hangers and pipe covering.

E. Provide Grinnel, Fee & Mason, Crane or equivalent heavy steel riser clamps onvertical risers at floors to support pipes.

F. Provide producer speciality, Jones Manufacturing or equal chrome plated brassescutcheons wherever pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings in exposed orfinished areas.

G. All piping projecting from chases shall be rigidly supported in the wall or chase. Loosely supported fixtures or accessories will not be accepted.

1.8 VALVES AND UNIONS

A. Furnish and install all valves, unions, stops, connections, etc. shown on plansand necessary to make a complete system in working order. Provide valves oninlet and outlet of all equipment and fixtures and on branch lines to fixtures orgroups of fixtures.

B. Ball Valves, 3" and smaller, rated for 150 PSI saturated steam pressure, 600 PSIWOG pressure; shall be 2-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTMB-62, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable TFE seats andseals, blow-out proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder endsfor condenser water, chilled water and domestic hot and cold water service of





NIBCO Design S-580-70, Milwaukee BA-150-S or equal, threaded ends ofheating hot water and low pressure steam of NIBCO Design T-580-70,Milwaukee BA-100-S or equal. For chilled water insulated piping systems,provide ball valves with extended stem, insulated handle with protective thermalbarrier sleeve to prevent condensate moisture drip and pipe insulationdeterioration. At Contractor’s option, Victaulic Style 722 or 721 ball valves maybe used.

C. All valves, unions, etc. where pipe is chrome plated shall have similar finish. Allexposed supplies to plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated.

D. Domestic water valves (below grade): M & H AWWA Series C-509 resilient gatevalve with low torque operation, positive shut-off, O- Ring seals, full epoxycoating and square valve stem end. Provide two (2) adjustable "TEE" handlevalve wrenches to be turned over to the owner after construction is complete.

E. Gate Valves, 3 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronzemounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; with flangedends "Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backing bland assembly.

F. Globe Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: NSS SP-80; Class 125; body and screwedbonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass orreplaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland,"Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150valves meeting the above where system pressure requires.

G. Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67; rated at 200 psi; cast-ironbody conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B. Provide valves with field replaceableEPDM sleeve, nickel-plated ductile iron disc (except aluminum bronze disc forvalves installed in condenser water piping), stainless steel stem, and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide lever operators with locks for sizes 2 through 6 inchesand gear operators with position indicator for sizes 8 through 24 inches. Provide"Non-Leakage" full threaded lug flange body type capable of being broken downat one side of the valve remaining closed. Drill and tap valves on dead-endservice or requiring additional body strength. At Contractor’s option Victaulic 300BFV for grooved piping systems maybe used.

H. Swing Check Valves, 2 Inch-and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 cast-bronzebody and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, andbronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable ofbeing reground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 150 valvesmeeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections, where systempressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available.

I. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175





FM approved for fire protection piping system), cast iron body and bolted capconforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable ofbeing refitted while the valve remains in the line. At Contractor’s option, VictaulicStyle 716 for grooved piping systems may be used.

J. Wafer Check Valves: Class 2500, cast-iron body; with replaceable bronze seat,and non-slam design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainlesssteel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves designed to open and close atapproximately one foot differential pressure.

K. Lift Check Valves, 2 Inch-and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and capconforming to ASTM B 62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, withstainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with renewable "Teflon" disc, andthreaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and grounded while thevalve remains in the line.

L. Select Valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except providethreaded ends for heating hot water.

1.9 PIPE MARKERS

A. Provide pipe markers and directional arrows on all piping in building and on bothsides of all valves located above ceiling. Markers shall be as manufactured byW.H. Bradley Co., or equal. All letters shall be color-coded and sized asrecommended by OSHA. Samples of the type of letters to be used shall besubmitted with shop drawings.

B. The following pipe and valves shall be identified: Domestic cold, hot water,natural gas pipe and valves throughout project.

C. Pipe markers with arrows shall indicate lines content and shall be located 20 feeton center and at each charge of direction of line. Identification bands shall becolor codedto match pipe markers and shall be provided 10 feet on center. Pipeidentification markers shall be taped at each end and shall be taped around theentire circumference of pipe.

1.10 PIPING SYSTEMS GENERALLY

A. Arrange, install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb and as directas possible; form right angles, or parallel lines with building walls. The mostpractical appearance of piping runs is required. Keep pipes close to walls,partitions, ceilings; off-set only where necessary to follow walls as directed.





B. Before installing piping, check plumbing and HVAC drawings with architectural,mechanical, structural, electrical drawings; make accurate layout of plumbingand HVAC piping. Where interferences may appear and departures fromindicated arrangements are required, consult with other trades involved; come toagreement as to changed locations and elevations of piping; obtain approval ofproposed changes. Note runs of other contractor’s piping and large conduitsand cooperate to achieve neat appearance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, conceal all piping in building construction in finishedareas. Install such piping in time so as not to cause delay to work of other tradesand to allow ample time for tests and approval; do not cover before approval isobtained.

D. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other and building lines; space them atdistance to permit access for serving, valves, and to create most practicalappearance when racked with conduits, refrigerant, etc., provided by othercontractors.

E. Keep fixture branches concealed to points above floor close to fixtures; exposeonly as much as necessary for final connection. Rigidly support pipes projectingfrom walls, chases, etc., in wall or chase to make firm, well-braced installation. Loosely supported pipe or accessory is not acceptable.

F. Install horizontal piping to coordinate with other trades and install without sags orhumps.

G. Grade inside sewer piping at uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot, minimum; wherethis is impossible, maintain slope as directed but in no case less than 1/8 inchper foot. Waste lines 3 inches and smaller must grade at minimum 1/4 inch perfoot. See drawings for fall on exterior sewer lines.

H. Grade other piping as specified under heading or service where used, or asdirected.

I. Keep piping free from scale and dirt, protect open pipe ends whenever work issuspended during construction. To prevent foreign bodies entering and lodgingin pipe, use temporary plugs or other approved material.

J. Where changes in pipe sizes occur, do not bush down; use only reducing fittings. For drainage piping changes in direction, use long sweep where possible;otherwise, short-sweep 1/4 bends or combination Y and 1/8 bends; also Y’s incombination with other bends.

K. Provide shut off valves at all supply connections to all equipment. Suppliers of





equipment shall provide rough-in drawings and this contractor shall fully connectall items, supplying necessary piping and fittings as required, unless otherwisenoted individually.

L. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal.

M. Locate valves for easy access and operations. Where concealed, notify GeneralContractor of exact location in order that he may leave openings for accesspanels. Provide access panels.

N. Provide unions, screwed or flanged, where indicated, and in following locationseven if not indicated and one inch by-passes around equipment.

O. All 90 deg changes in direction shall be poured in concrete thrust blocks (4000PSI concrete).

P. All straight joints shall be insulated and sealed as per manufacturer standardprocedures.

Q. Complete installation shall be in accordance with manufacturersrecommendations.

R. The Contractor shall exercise care in cleaning joints after making cuts on pipe toprevent pipe particles from entering the system.

S. Drilled “T” shall be acceptable for use in hard copper pipe. Weld-O-let fittingsshall be used in iron pipe.

T. Provide dielectric unions between copper and iron pipe.

U. All piping penetrations thru fire and/or smoke rated partitions shall be sealed with3M fire stop or approved fire rated sealant.

1.11 SHOCK ABSORBERS

A. All water service to fixtures or groups of fixtures shall have concealed airchambers. Air chambers shall be of the same diameter as the supply or headerpipes and 12 inches long on both hot and cold water branches. Locate shockabsorbers close to fixture or at end of header.

B. Shock arresters shall be installed for sterilizer water supplies.

1.12 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves in new construction for all pipes passing through walls, floors,beams, etc. Sleeves passing through structural members shall be of cast iron or





Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves passing through non-structural walls or floorsshall be of 26 gauge galvanized iron or manufactured plastic sleeves. Jointsbetween sleeves and pipes passing through non-structural walls or floors shallbe of 26 gauge galvanized iron or manufactured plastic sleeves. Joints betweensleeves and pipes passing through floors shall be made watertight with plasticmaterials. Where pipes pass through waterproofing membrane, flashing sleevesshall be installed.

1.13 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide escutcheons for all exposed lines passing through floors, walls, andceilings. They shall be chrome plated brass and shall be of such flange size asto cover necessary penetrating openings.

1.14 FLASHING

A. Flash all vent penetrations through roof. Extend flashing approximately 10inches in all directions at base and turn ends down into top of pipe. Off-set ventswhere necessary to provide 4 feet minimum clearance from other flashing suchas outside walls, curbs, etc. Note: All vents shall be 25 feet from fresh airintakes.

1.15 TEST

A. Make such tests of work as specified, or required by Architect or by State andMunicipal Bureaus having jurisdiction, and under their supervision. Perform testsin presence of Architect's representative. Notify Architect two days prior totesting.

B. Provide apparatus, temporary piping connections, or other requirementsnecessary for tests. Take precautions to prevent damage to building or contentsby tests. Contractor is required to repair and make good at his expense damageso caused.

C. Correct leaks, defects, or deficiencies discovered as result of tests. Repeat testsuntil test requirements are fully complied with caulking of pipe joints to remedyleaks is not permitted, except on lead and oakum joints.

1.16 VALVE TAGS

A. Provide metal valve tags on all valves.

B. All valve tags shall have identification number. Contractor shall obtainnumbering sequence from owner.





C. Provide catalog listing of each valve tag number with identification as to type ofsystem valve controls and area of building or equipment affected when valve isclosed. Include in an index to other valves required for isolation.

D. Contractor shall also provide and install on ceiling grid location as directed byowner, white gravoply 1/8" thick, 1" wide length as required for name tag, withcolored capital letters as following:

1. Domestic cold water, and domestic hot water, cut off valves aboveceilings - color to be determined by owner during shop drawing stage.

1.17 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. General Application: Use gate ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe,ball, and butterfly for throttling duty.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged toallow equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required onflanged devices.

D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. All valves, on insulated piping shall be complete with extended lever handlestem.

1.18 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish and install access panels where valves, dampers, control boxes, etc. areconcealed in walls, ceilings, floors, or otherwise inaccessible or wherespecifically called for on plans. Panels shall be Milcor Style DW, or Bar-Co.Model 500, J-L Industries Model WB, or equal sized as required and furnishedwith prime coat finish.

1.19 RATED WALL PENETRATIONS

A. Contractor shall refer to fire stopping section for proper installation of all pipespenetrating rated walls.





B. All ductwork penetrating fire walls shall have rated dampers with access doors.

END OF SECTION 22 05 00


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PLUMBING INSULATION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Pipe insulation shall not begin until all work has been tested andfound to be tight. All insulation adhesives, sealers, tapes and masticshall meet the latest NFPA requirements and shall meet 25/50/50flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

B. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations.

C. All pipe insulation exterior of building shall be banded with aluminum bands,three to a section and with one band on each side of each fitting, valve, etc.

D. Insulation shall be continuous through walls and ceilings.

E. All valves, strainers, etc. shall be insulated the same as its adjacent piping andthe covering shall extend all the way up to the equipment.

F. USE HIGH DENSITY INSULATION INSERTS AT HANGERS ON ALL PIPING 1-1/2" AND ABOVE TO PREVENT CRUSHING OF INSULATION.

1.2 THERMAL INSULATION: After all work has been tested and approved, insulate as

follows:

A. INSULATION SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THEMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

1.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:

A. Cover all domestic cold and hot water piping, valves and fittings above slab with1" thick, high density fiberglass insulation with Universal Fire Retardant Jacket,Owens/Corning "25 ASJ/SSL", Knauf ASJ-SSL, or equal. All laps are to besealed and stapled in place. Fittings are to be mitered segments of insulationheld in place with white vapor barrier tape for concealed areas and Zeston 25/50PVC, Knauf 25/50 rated PVC, pre-molded insulated fitting covers in exposedareas.

B. All water lines exposed in the vehicle bays and on the outside of the buildingexposed to the weather shall be covered with 0.160 smooth aluminum jacket andelbows in addition to fiberglass insulation.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PLUMBING INSULATION



C. Domestic cold and hot water lines run below slab within building shall beinsulated with 1/2" thick closed cell tube insulation. Apply two (2) coats of masticon insulation.

1.4 INSULATION THROUGH HANGERS AND SLEEVES

A. The insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers and pipe sleeves. Athangers where the pipe is supported by insulation, provide a galvanized ironprotection shield. Provide pipes 2-inch i.p.s. and larger with insulation inserts atpoints of hanger supports. The inserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass,prestressed molded glass fiber of minimum 13-pound density, or other approvalmaterial of the same thickness as adjacent insulation and not less than 13-pounddensity. The inserts shall have sufficient compression strength to adequatelysupport the pipe without compressing the inserts to a thickness less than theadjacent insulation. Inserts shall be 180 degrees and not less than the length ofthe protection shield. Vapor barrier facing of the insert shall be the same as thefacing on the adjacent insulation. Where copper clad hanger are used ondomestic copper pipe, insulation may cover pipe and hanger.

1.5 CONDENSATE WASTE LINES & P-TRAPS

A. P-traps and drain lines receiving HVAC condensate shall be insulated with 2-1/8"thick 3/4 # density fiberglass ductwrap insulation with aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be sealed at all seams and joints.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WATER SUPPLY



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SERVICE

A. The Contractor shall extend water throughout the project as indicatedon the Drawings.

B. Contractor shall coordinate any outages with owner prior to connectionand schedule as required. Water outage will be accomplished after normal workinghours or weekend. Contractor shall have figure in base bid to make connectionsafter normal hours or weekends.

1.2 GENERAL

A. All water supply piping shall be of materials hereinbefore specified. Makeprovisions for expansion and contraction of hot water lines by means of expansionbends or loops as required.

B. All water lines shall be disinfected in accordance with The State of LouisianaSanitary Code, Latest Standard Plumbing Code with amendments.

C. Submit three (3) copies of "Certificate of Performance" at completion of the project.

D. Make up the complete water supply system. Connect to all fixtures and outletsrequiring water.

E. At each fixture or group of fixtures with lines 1-1/4" or below, furnish and install a12" high air chamber of same size as branch feed line. On lines 1-1/4" and aboveand at fixtures with quick closing valves such as dishwashers, tempered watervalves, etc., install "Shocktrol", "Precision Plumbing Products" or equal waterhammer arrester properly sized for each unit.

1.3 TESTING

A. All domestic water lines, unless elsewhere specified, shall be tested not less than200 psi hydrostatic pressure for a minimum of five hours.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WASTE WATER DISPOSAL



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SERVICE

A. Connect to sewer shown on plans. Verify invert prior to rough-in. Contractor shall pay all service and connection charges.

1.2 GENERAL

A. The system of sewage and drainage in general shall be as hereinbefore specified.

B. All work shall be in strict accordance with the State Plumbing Code, IBC, and withall local codes. Piping shall be routed as shown on Plans or in an acceptablemanner to meet building conditions. Venting shall be as shown on plumbing riserdiagrams.

C. Connections between traps and cast iron pipes are to be made with heavy brassferrules or cast iron pipe.

D. All p-traps installed below slab shall be 6" deep-seal p-traps.

E. Provide reducers, increasers, special flanges, and fittings where required betweenpiping work and fixtures in order to connect and complete work and render it readyfor use. Make any offsets required to avoid construction.

F. All water closets shall be mounted with 4" closet bends.

G. All lines 2" and smaller shall be sloped 1/4" per foot; all lines 3" and larger shall besloped 1/8" per foot. Piping shall be laid so slope is continuous.

H. All sewer vents shall extend 8" above roof and terminate in an appropriate flashingcollar. No vents shall penetrate roof within 48" of an exterior wall. Offset in ceilingas required. All back vents shall be taken off as near trap as possible.

1.3 TESTING

A. Test all sanitary sewer waste, acid waste and vent lines inside building with aminimum of 10' water head for 15 minutes, in accordance with the State PlumbingCode and Standard Plumbing Code.

B. All exterior sewer piping shall be air tested under 5 psi for 15 minutes.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PLUMBING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish all labor and materials as hereinbefore specified, indicated orreasonably implied for the complete installation of the followingsystems:

1. Domestic Cold Water System2. Domestic Hot Water System3. Sanitary Sewer System

1.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts other than type listed below as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, Zurnand Wade, will not be acceptable.

B. Cleanouts shall be provided where shown on plans, at each change of direction ofthe building drain greater than 45 degrees and at or near the foot of each verticalwaste or soil stack. Location of all cleanouts shall be the same size as the piping. Every cleanout shall be installed so that the cleanout opens in the direction of theflow of the drainage line or at right angle thereto. Floor cleanouts shall be anadjustable type, have double drainage flange, with clamping collar and nickelbronze cover. Top of cleanout shall be level with top of finished floor so there is acontinuous surface.

1.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. All floor drains shall be constructed of cast iron and shall be complete with clampingdevices as required. The following numbers are taken from the Wade Catalog: Equivalent drains as manufactured by Josam, Zurn or Smith will be acceptable. NOOTHER MANUFACTURERS WILL BE ACCEPTED WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL.

B. All floor drains and hub drains shall be installed with 6" deep seal p-traps.

C. Outside cleanouts shall be as detailed on the Plans.

1.4 FLASHING

A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof in connection with this Contract withsheet lead, not less than 2-1/2# to the square foot, built 6" into the waterproofing,running 8" up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PLUMBING



1.5 EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTIONS

A. Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for connecting to equipment at locationindicated on Plans in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Refer toArchitectural Drawings for list of equipment. Plumbing Contractor shall providenecessary rough-in required for all equipment and shall completely connect all plumbing services for the equipment. It is the obligation of the Plumbing Contractorto obtain correct rough-in dimensions for all equipment.

1.6 PLUMBING FIXTURESA. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all plumbing fixtures shown on

accompanying Drawings. Refer to both Plumbing and Architectural, and provide allfixtures shown on either. Fixtures shall be complete with all necessary brass andaccessories required for a complete installation, including traps, escutcheons, anglesupplies, basin cocks, etc. All fixtures shall be new and must be delivered to thebuilding properly crated in perfect condition.

B. All brass must be of the best quality. Lightweight goods will not be accepted.

C. All brass pipe shall be seamless brass tubing and nipples shall be extra heavy.

D. "P" traps on lavatories and sinks shall be cast brass with cleanouts.

E. All exposed piping shall be chromium plated.

F. Provide cut-off valves at each fixture in both hot and cold water piping.

G. For the purpose of establishing type and class of fixtures required, the followingplate numbers shown on drawings have been taken from the Manufacturer's Catalog as indicated: Fixture manufacturer's and Model numbers with priorapproval will be acceptable, however fixtures and accessories shall meet standardsand features indicated in plumbing fixture schedule on plans.

H. Refer to Architectural Drawings for mounting height and exact location of allplumbing fixtures. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to meet the latest A.D.A.Requirements.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of theContract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions, Division 0)and Division 01 as appropriate, apply to the Work specified in thisSection.

B. Refer to all Division as well as the Specifications for the other various trades andmaterials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding mechanical work.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor and material necessary to provide and install the completemechanical portion of this Contract, including plumbing, air conditioning, heatingand ventilating systems as called for herein and on accompanying drawings. Partsof the mechanical division may be bid separately or in combination, at theContractor's option; however, it shall be the responsibility of the General Contractorto assure himself that all items covered in the Mechanical Division have beenincluded if he chooses to accept separate bids.

B. It is the intent of this specification that all Division 23 materials with temperaturesbelow ambient conditions or conveying any fluid/gas at temperatures below 70 deg.F be insulated to completely eliminate the potential for condensation. Unlessspecified elsewhere in these specifications, for materials that do not require access,insulate with 2-1/8" thick 3/4# density fiberglass duct wrap insulation with foil face(seal all joints air and water tight). For materials requiring occasional access, use2" thick closed cell rubberized insulation with re-sealable fabric joints (hook and looptype).

C. Contractor shall refer to the Architectural and Structural drawings and installequipment, piping, etc. to meet building and space requirements. No equipmentshall be bid on or submitted for approval if it will not fit in the space provided.

D. It is the intention of these specifications that all mechanical systems shall befurnished complete with all necessary valves, controls, insulation, piping devices,equipment, etc. necessary to provide a satisfactory installation that is complete andin good working order. The HVAC system shall ensure that under allcircumstances, the building shall be kept at temperatures and indoor space relativehumidities that when compared to outside temperatures and relative humiditiesprotect building finishes installed under this contract and/or existing floor, wall andceiling finishes within the building from damage due to excessive temperature or





humidity. HVAC system shall ensure that building remain under a slight positivepressure and shall alarm in the event of a negative pressure condition. In additionContractor shall provide training to Owner in regard to the need for spacetemperature and humidity control whenever the outdoor dew point (wetbulbtemperature) exceed 62.5 deg. F and freeze protection procedures whenever theoutdoor temperature (drybulb temperature) drops below 32 deg. F. Contractor shallobtain written sign-off on the part of the Owner to the receipt of all training includingthe above and all required training referenced hereafter, throughout thesespecifications. Failure to obtain this sign-off shall be constructed as evidence thatproper training was not given.

E. Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself thoroughly with all existingfacilities and conditions which would affect his portion of the work. Failure to do soshall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of installing his work to meetthe conditions.

F. This Contractor shall protect the entire system and all parts thereof from injurythroughout the project and up to acceptance of the work. Failure to do so shall besufficient cause for the Architect to reject any piece of equipment.

1.3 DEMOLITION

A. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid to determine the extent of workrequired to complete the project.

B. Contractor shall coordinate demolition with owner. All equipment shall be salvagedfor owner. Locate equipment as directed by owner. All equipment and materialsnot salvaged by the owner shall be removed from the site and discarded at thecontractors expense.

C. Contractor shall coordinate all work with general contractor and phase work asrequired by project.

D. All equipment piping, etc. required to be removed to accommodate themodifications shall be removed.

E. Contractor shall maintain services to existing facilities which shall remain during andafter construction is complete.

F. Contractor shall coordinate any shutdown of services with the owner. It is intendedthat the building will remain occupied during construction. Contractor shall scheduleshut down of services with the owner in order to prevent disruption of buildingoccupancy.





G. Contractor shall be responsible for draining down of existing systems to completedemolition. All work shall be scheduled with the owner. Contractor shall also beresponsible for refilling system and removing all air in order to return the systemsto proper operating conditions.

H. All shutdown of services shall be done at night during a time period approved byowner. The systems shall be required to be back up and running each morningunless otherwise approved by the owner.

1.4 GROUNDS AND CHASES

A. This Contractor shall see that all required chases, grounds, holes and accessoriesnecessary for the installation of his work are properly built in as the workprogresses; otherwise, he shall bear the cost of providing them.


A. Initial cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor, withthe Mechanical Contractor being responsible for laying out and marking any and allholes required for the reception of his work. No structural beams or joists shall becut or thimbled without first receiving the approval of the Architect. After initialsurfacing has been done, any further cutting, patching and painting shall be doneat this Contractor's expense.

1.6 FILL AND CHARGES FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Fill and charge with materials or chemicals all those devices or equipment asrequired to comply with the manufacturer's guarantee or as required for properoperation of the equipment.


A. Prime bidder is responsible for all work , of all trades and sub-contractors biddingthis project. It is the prime bidders responsibility, prior to submitting a bid to ensurethat sub-contractors coordinate all aspects of the work between trades, sub-contractors, etc. to the fullest extent possible.

B. Prime bidder shall ensure that all sub-contractors, suppliers, equipment vendors,etc., obtain all necessary and pertinent contract document information pertaining totheir work prior to the submission of a bid. Contractor shall realize that differentsub-contractors may furnish equipment, accessories, devices, etc. necessary for acomplete and working installation, that require provision of services by another sub-contractor or trade.





C. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division are required to review allcontract documents including but not limited to Architectural drawings, Structuraldrawings, Mechanical drawings, Plumbing drawings, Electrical drawings, etc. tocoordinate requirements and responsibilities with and through prime bidder.

D. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by furnishing a bid on aportion of the prime contract are indicating that they have received all contractdocuments and coordinated services provided under their portion of the work withthe prime bidder; they are indicating that they have expressed any pertinentquestions (which would result from a detailed, thorough review of the entire set ofcontract documents) to the prime bidder in accordance with Division 0 & 01requirements, prior to bidding.

E. All timely, pertinent, questions provided in writing prior to bids, in accordance withDivision 0 & 01 requirements, will be clarified, defined, or otherwise explained in awritten addendum and/or addendums prior to bids, in accordance in Division 0 & 01requirements.

F. It is not the intention of these contract documents to leave any issue relating tocoordination between trades or sub-contractors vaguely defined. The intention isto define all issues, coordination matters, equipment requirements, sizes, routing,etc. to the satisfaction of the prime bidder, prior to receipt of bids.

G. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by virtue of the submissionof a bid to the prime bidder, are indicating that they have reviewed the entire set ofcontract documents with due diligence and regard for the Owner's desire for acomprehensive and complete bid proposal; that they have expressed all concernsor questions requiring clarification on matters of coordination between trades and/orsub-contractors; that they have expressed any such concerns or questions in writingin accordance with Division 0 & 01 requirements.

H. Prime bidders, by submission of a comprehensive bid on the project are indicatingthat the subcontractors selected in their bid have complied with all Division 0 & 01requirements, that they have indicated in writing, prior to bidding, all questions orconcerns requiring clarification and/or explanation and have documented any andall specific exclusions involving work that would generally be considered to be workof their trade. The prime bidder shall coordinate all work so that anything excludedby the bidder of all or any portions of this section or division, have been addressedprior to bids in one of the following manners:

1. The work has been confirmed, by the prime bidder, to be work of anothertrade or subcontractor (whose proposal is also being accepted).

2. Clarification of the matter has been made through the prime designprofessional via written addendum and is clearly and mutually understood





by the prime bidder and the party raising the issue/question, or seekingclarification.

3. The work has been accepted as the responsibility of the prime contractordirectly.


A. The term "provide" when used in the Contract Documents includes all itemsnecessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

B. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material,fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, shall beinterpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed aslimiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use anyarticle, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in thejudgement of the Architect expressed in writing is equal to that specified.

C. Coordinate and properly relate all Work of this Division to building structure andwork of all other trades.

D. Visit premises and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions; verify alldimensions in field. Advise Architect of any discrepancies prior to Bid Date inaccordance with Division 0.

E. Do not rough-in for any item or equipment furnished by others or noted "Not inContract" (NIC), without first receiving rough-in information from physicallyexamining the existing equipment, receiving specific cut sheet information from theOwner’s representative, other trades and/or Architect. Rough-in services for “NIC”equipment as required, as the work progresses.

F. Provide storage and protection for all equipment and materials in accordance withrequirements of Division 0 and Division 0 & 01. Replace any equipment andmaterials damaged by improper handling, storage, or protection, at no additionalcost to Owner.

G. Keep premises clean in accordance with requirements of Division 0 and Division 01.

1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions are only allowed by approval of the Architect prior to Bid Date asstipulated in Division 0 and/or Division 01.

B. Design of systems is based on specific equipment. If the use of othermanufacturer's equipment, even though approved by Architect, involves additionalcost due to space requirements, foundation requirements, increased mechanical or





electrical services, the cost of such extra work shall be borne by manufacturer ofsubstituted equipment. Even though a manufacturer's name appears in theContract Documents as having acceptable equipment, their equipment with differentmodel numbers shall be classified as being a substitute to the equipment originallydesigned for and named in the Contract Documents. Substitute equipment,materials, etc., will not be allowed to deviate from Contract Document requirements. Furnish all options specified or reasonably implied from the contract documents. Specifically identify any variance is regard to submittal versus specifiedperformance on the cover sheet of each submittal.


A. While it may be in the project Owner’s interest to consider the first cost moneysaving that may be generated via alternatives and options generated viaparticipation in Value Engineering, Division 23/23 contractor shall realize thatsubstantive offers of Value Engineering (V/E), if accepted by the Owner, constitutea design-build agreement (offer and acceptance) with the owner, and drasticallychange the design concept of the project, as developed by the Professional ofRecord identified on the Contract Documents.

B. Should contractor offer, and the owner accept value engineering options that alteraspects of the system design, equipment, performance and/or performanceverification or monitoring of respective systems, Division 23 contractor shall provideduly licensed professional engineering consultants working on behalf of the Division23 contractor (including sub-contractors and equipment vendors/manufacturers) toreview, approve and take professional responsibility for performance and suitabilityof V/E hybrid systems, materials or operational changes related to respective V/Eitems. The Division 23 contractor’s licensed professional engineering consultantsand the Division 23 contractor assume any and all responsibility for the design andsuitability in terms of performance, of hybrid systems installed, as Division 23contractor’s Professional of Record, absolving the original project Professional ofRecord (identified on the original Contract Documents, released for the originalproject Bid/Negotiation) from responsibility for the V/E hybrid systems portion of thework.

C. Division 23 contractor, via the offer and acceptance of value engineering items onthe project agrees to provide professional engineering design services and take fulland complete responsibility for the hybrid design. Further, the Division 23contractor’s (V/E Items)professional of record (either employees, or independentconsultants to the Division 23 contractor) through the offer and acceptance of V/Eitems, agree to indemnify and hold harmless the project owner, the owner’s originalA/E team (Professional of Record on behalf of the owner for the original ContractDocuments) their heirs and assigns in regard to the V/E changes and their impacton the Division 23 systems altered, affected or modified, in whole or in part. TheProfessional of Record shown on the original Contract Documents in regard to the





systems altered, adjusted, revised, modified or otherwise affected by the valueengineering items implemented, shall be absolved of design responsibility as aresult of implementation of V/E items, and their original use of Engineering Sealsused for original Contract Documents, shall not apply.


A. The specific intent of these Contract Documents is to provide the various systems,equipment, etc. to the Owner complete and in a thoroughly calibrated functionalcondition.

B. The Drawings shall not be construed as shop drawings. In the event of a possibleinterference with piping or equipment of another trade, items requiring set gradeand elevations shall have precedence over other items Should any majorinterference develop, immediately notify the Architect.

C. In laying out Work, refer to mechanical, electrical, structural, and architecturaldrawings at all times in order to avoid interference and undue delays in the progressof the Work.

D. Furnish all plumbing fixtures (with required accessories) shown on either theplumbing drawings or the architectural drawings. Review Architectural caseworkelevations and identify fixtures indicated. Provide fixtures indicated. Rough-in forall fixtures as work progress. Verify prior to fixture shop drawing submittal.


A. Work shall be in full accord with the most stringent interpretation of the StateSanitary Code, local ordinances, building codes, and other applicable national, local,and state regulations.

B. Equipment shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the Nationalbureau of Fire Underwriters and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

C. Items provided under this Division shall comply with the American NationalStandards Institute (ANSI) "Specifications for Making Buildings and FacilitiesAccessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People," ANSI A 117.1

D. In the possible event of conflict between codes or regulations and ContractDocuments, the most stringent interpretation of either shall govern (provided ifexceeds the requirements of other codes. In the event of an irreconcilabledifference between codes or regulations notify the Architect/Engineer immediately.





E. In addition to the codes heretofore mentioned, all mechanical work and equipmentshall conform to the applicable portions of the following specifications, codes and/orregulations:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE)

2. National Electrical Code (NEC)3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)5. American Gas Association(AGA)6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)7. International Building Code (IBC)

F. All materials, equipment and accessories installed under this Contract shall conformto all rules, codes, etc. as recommended by National Associations governing themanufacturer, rating and testing of such materials, equipment and accessories. Allmaterials shall be new and of the best quality and first class in every respect. Whenever directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit a sample forapproval before proceeding.

G. Where laws or local regulations provide that certain accessories such as gauges,thermometers, relief valves and parts be installed on equipment, it shall beunderstood that such equipment be furnished complete with the necessaryaccessories, whether or not called for in these Specifications.

H. All unfired and fired pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the A.S.M.E.Code and so stamped. Furnish shop certificates for each vessel. Contractor shallprovide and pay for first operating certificate as per State Fire Marshal Regulations.


A. Obtain and pay for permits required for the Work of this Division. Pay fees inconnection therewith, including necessary inspection fees.

B. Pay any and taxes levied for Work of this Division, including municipal and/or statesales tax where applicable.

C. All permits, fees, certificates, etc. for the installation, inspections, plan review,service connections locations, and/or construction of the work which are requiredby any authority and/or agencies having jurisdiction, shall be obtained and paid forby the Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall make all tests required by the Architect, Engineer or othergoverning authorities at no additional cost to the Owner.





E. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and local governing authorities before anytests are made, and the tests are not to be drawn off a line covered or insulateduntil examined and approved by the authorities. In event defects are found, theseshall be corrected and the work shall be retested.

F. Prior to requesting final inspection by the Architect, the Contractor shall have acomplete coordination and adjustment meeting of all of his sub-contractors directlyresponsible for the operation of any portion of the system. At the time of thismeeting, each and every sequence of operation shall be checked to assure properoperation. Notify the Architect in writing ten (10) days prior to this meeting,instructing him of the time, date and whom you are requesting to be present.

G. This project shall not be accepted until the above provisions are met to thesatisfaction of the Architect.


A. Install and operate equipment and material in strict accord with manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions. The manufacturer's instructions shall becomepart of the Contract Documents and shall supplement Drawings and Specifications.

1.15 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Submit shop drawings, project data, and samples in accordance with requirementsof Division 0/and or Division 01.

B. Shop drawings shall consist of published ratings or capacity data, detailedconstruction drawings for fabricated items, wiring and control diagrams,performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings,and other pertinent data. Submit drawings showing revisions to equipment layoutsdue to use of alternate or substitute equipment.

C. Where approved manufacturers and suppliers of equipment, materials, etc. areunable to fully comply with Contract Document requirements, specifically call suchdeviations to attention of Architect on submittals. Type deviations on a separatesheet; underlined statements or notations on standard brochures, equipment flysheets, etc. will not be accepted.

D. Approval of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing requiredquantities and verifying dimensions. In addition, approval shall not waive originalintent of Contract Documents.





E. Failure to obtain written approval of equipment shall be considered sufficientgrounds for rejection of said equipment regardless of the stage of completion of theproject.

1.16 REVIEW OF MATERIALS:

A. Whenever manufacturers or trade names are mentioned in these Plans orSpecifications, the words "or approved equivalent" shall be assumed to followwhether or not so stated. Manufacturers or trade names are used to establish astandard of quality only, and should not be construed to infer a preference. Equivalent products which meet the Architect's approval will be accepted; however,these products must be submitted to the Architect a minimum of ten (10) days priorto the Bid Date.

B. Submission shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, rating table andconstruction features.

C. Upon receipt and checking of this submittal, the Architect will issue an addendumlisting items which are approved as equivalent to those specified. THECONTRACTOR SHALL BASE HIS BID SOLELY ON THOSE ITEMS SPECIFIEDOR INCLUDED IN THE "PRIOR APPROVAL ADDENDUM", AS NO OTHER ITEMWILL BE ACCEPTABLE.

D. Prior approval of a particular piece of equipment does not mean automatic finalacceptance and will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of assuringhimself that this equipment is in complete accord with the Plans and Specificationsand that it will fit into the space provided. Shop drawings must be submitted on allitems of equipment for approval as hereinafter specified.

E. Before proceeding with work and/or within thirty (30) days after the award of theGeneral Contract for this work, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to theArchitect complete shop and working drawings of such apparatus, equipment,controls, insulation, etc. to be provided in this project. These drawings shall givedimensions, weights, mounting data, performance curves and other pertinentinformation.

F. The Architect's approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from theresponsibility of incorrectly figured dimensions or any other errors which may becontained in these drawings. Any omission from the shop drawings orspecifications, even through approved by the Architect, shall not relieve theContractor from furnishing and erecting same.





G. Seven (7) sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. These submittals shall be supplied as part of this Contractor's contract. Anydrawings not approved shall be resubmitted until they are approved. SUBMIT ALLSHOP DRAWINGS AT THE SAME TIME. NO SEPARATE ITEMS WILL BEACCEPTED.

H. Submit one (1) sepia with two (2) blueline prints of all mechanical room layoutsshowing locations of all equipment, piping, etc. to insure all will fit in space provided. Submit drawings at 1/4" scale.


A. Keep Project Record Documents in accordance with requirements of Division 0and/or Division 01.

B. During construction period, keep accurate records of installations made under thisDivision, paying particular attention to major interior and exterior underground andconcealed piping, ductwork, etc.

C. The Contractor shall obtain at his cost, two sets of blueline prints of the original biddocuments by the Architect. One set shall be kept on the site with all informationas referenced below, and shall update same as the work progresses. The other setwill be utilized to record all field changes to a permanent record copy for the Owner.

D. If the Contractor elects to vary from the Contract Documents and secures priorapproval from the Architect for any phase of the work, he shall record in a neat and

readable manner, ALL such variances on the blueline print in red. The originalbluelines shall be returned to the Architect for documentation.

E. All deviations from sizes, locations, and from all other features of the installationsshown in the Contract Documents shall be recorded.

F. In addition, it shall be possible using these drawings to correctly and easily locate,identify and establish sizes of all piping, directions and the like, as well as otherfeatures of the work which will be concealed underground and/or in the finishedbuilding.

G. Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to columns, linesor walls, locating all turns, etc., and by properly referenced centerline or invertelevations and rates of fall.

H. For work concealed in the building, sufficient information shall be given so it can belocated with reasonable accuracy and ease. In some cases this may be bydimension. In others, it may be sufficient to illustrate the work on the drawings inrelation to the spaces in the building near which it was actually installed. TheArchitect's/Engineer's decision in this matter will be final.





I. The following requirements apply to all "As-Built" drawings:

1. They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense.2. All such drawings shall be done carefully and neatly, and in a form approved

by the Architect/Engineer.3. Additional drawings shall be provided as necessary for clarifications.4. These drawings shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work

and shall be available upon request for examination by theArchitect/Engineer; and when necessary, to establish clearances for otherparts of the work.

5. "As-built" drawings shall be returned to the Architect upon completion of thework and are subject to approval of the Architect/Engineer.

1.18 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Provide excavating and backfilling necessary for Work of this Division. Comply withprovisions of Division 2, Site Work, if applicable.

B. Trenches shall be inspected by Code Authorities and/or Owner's Representativebefore and after piping is laid. Give Owner' Representative 24-hour notice for eachinspection. If any trenches are filled without Owner's Representative inspection andas subsequently found to be deficient, the trenches shall be uncovered, inspected,and then re-filled, if requested by Owner's Representative.

C. Provide minimum 18 inches of cover or in compliance with local published frost linedata (if greater than 18 inches) to finish grades or paving at water piping.

D. For piping, provide bell holes at trench bottom to assure uniform bearing. Accuratelygrade trench bottoms by instrument before laying any pipe.

E. Protect and maintain trenches in dry condition until piping has been inspected andapproved. Immediately after approval, backfill trenches in tamped layers.

F. Compact fill to satisfaction of Architect and/or Owner's Representative.


A. Comply with requirements of Division 0 and Division 01 regarding cutting andpatching. Locate and timely install sleeves as required to minimize cutting andpatching.

B. Cutting, fitting, repairing, patching, and finishing of Work shall be done by craftsmenskilled in their respective trades. Where cutting is required, cut in such a manner asnot to weaken structure, partitions, or floors. Holes required to be cut must be cut





or drilled without breaking out around the holes. Where patching is necessary infinished areas of the building, the Architect will determine the extent of suchpatching and refinishing.

C. Where return air plenums above ceilings are utilized, Division 23 Contractor shallensure that return air openings are provided in walls run to deck, for proper returnair flow back to the AHU. Cut walls as required to provide openings sized formaximum 1000 feet per minute air flow velocity through openings above ceiling. Provide a fire damper at openings of fire walls and a smoke damper at openings ofsmoke walls. Coordinate electric or pneumatic services to smoke dampers viaautomatic temperature control/EMS Contractor.

D. Repairing Roadways and Walks: Coordinate all roadway work with authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Cut and/or bore under roadways for connection of utilities asrequired. Coordinate work through General Contractor. Where this contractor cutsor breaks roadways or walks to lay the piping, he shall repair or replace thesesections to match existing, unless specifically identified as the responsibility ofothers.

1.20 PAINTING

A. Painting shall be provided by General Contractor’s painting sub-contractor, unlessspecified otherwise. Leave exposed piping, materials, and equipment clean and freeof rust, grease, dirt, etc. before and after painting.

B. Factory finished equipment, fixtures, and materials which are marred, chipped,scratched, or otherwise unacceptable shall be repaired or replaced under thisDivision to Architect satisfaction, at no additions cost to Owner.

C. Coordinate all painting requirements with prime bidder prior to bids.

D. Paint all exposed piping inside and outside of building. Label all piping afterpainting as required. Utilize industry standard paint colors for respective systemunless direct otherwise by Architect. Review proposed color scheme withArchitect/Engineer prior to ordering materials.

1.21 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:

A. Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall clean and adjust all equipment,controls, valves, etc.; clean all piping, ductwork, etc.; and leave the entireinstallation in good working order.

1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS





A. Provide the Owner with three (3) copies of printed instructions indicating variouspieces of equipment by name and model number, complete with parts lists,maintenance and repair instructions and test and balance report.

B. COPIES OF SHOP DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE AS OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.

C. This information shall be bound in plastic hardbound notebooks with the job name,Architect and Engineer names permanently embossed on the cover. Rigid boarddividers with labeled tabs shall be provided for different pieces of equipment. Submit manuals to the Architect for approval.

D. In addition to the operation and maintenance brochure, the Contractor shall providea separate brochure which shall include registered warranty certificates on allequipment, especially any pieces of equipment which carry warranties exceedingone (1) year.

E. The operation and maintenance brochure shall be furnished with a detailed list ofall equipment furnished to the project, including the serial number and all pertinentnameplate data such as voltage, amperage draw, recommended fuse size, rpm,etc. The Contractor shall include this data on each piece of equipment furnishedunder this contract.

1.23 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for aperiod of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the project. Thisguarantee shall include furnishing of all labor and material necessary to make anyrepairs, adjustments or replacement of any equipment, parts, etc. necessary torestore the project to first class condition. This guarantee shall exclude only thechanging or cleaning of filters. Warranties exceeding one (1) year are hereinafterspecified with individual pieces of equipment.

B. If the Contractor's office is in excess of a fifty (50) mile radius of the project, he shallappoint a local qualified contractor to perform any emergency repairs oradjustments required during the guarantee period. The name of the contractorappointed to provide emergency services shall be submitted to the Architect for hisapproval.

1.24 LOCAL CONDITIONS

A. The location and elevation of all utility services is based on available surveys andutility maps and are reasonably accurate; however, these shall serve as a generalguide only, and the Contractor shall visit the site and verify the location and





elevation of all services to his satisfaction in order to determine the amount of workrequired for the execution of the Contract.

B. The Contractor shall contact the various utility companies, determine the extent oftheir requirements and he shall include in his bid all lawful fees and paymentsrequired by these companies for complete connection and services to the building,including meters, connection charges, street patching, extensions from meters tomain, etc.

C. In case major changes are required, this fact, together with the reasons therefor,shall be submitted to the Architect, in writing, not less than seven (7) days beforethe date of bidding. Failure to comply with this requirement will make the Contractorliable for any changes, additions and expenses necessary for the successfulcompletion of the project.

1.25 MINOR DEVIATIONS

A. Plans and detail sketches are submitted to limit, explain and define conditions,specified requirements, pipe sizes and manner of erecting work. Structural or otherconditions may require certain modifications from the manner of installation shown,and such deviations are permissible and shall be made as required. However,specified sizes and requirements necessary for satisfactory operation shall remainunchanged. It may be necessary to shift ducts or pipes, or to change the shape ofducts, and these changes shall be made as required. All such changes shall bereferred to the Architect for approval before proceeding. Extra charges shall not beallowed for these changes.

B. The Contractor shall realize that the drawings could delve into every step, sequenceor operation necessary for the completion of the project, without drawing on theContractor's experience or ingenuity. However, only typical details are shown onthe Plans. In cases where the Contractor is not certain about the method ofinstallation of his work, he shall ask for details. Lack of details will not be an excusefor improper installation.

C. In general, the drawings are diagrammatic and the Contractor shall install his workin a manner so that interferences between the various trades are avoided. In caseswhere interferences do occur, the Architect is to state which item was first installed.

1.26 VALVE TAGS

A. Secure metal tags to all valves. Labeling on all valve tags shall include type ofsystem the valve controls and the area of building, zone, or equipment numberaffected by valve operation. Tag shall be 2"minimum diameter brass, engraved withcode number, service and size. A framed list of the valves, giving manufacturer'sname, model number, type and location shall be mounted in the main basementequipment room.





1.27 MACHINERY GUARDS

A. This Contractor shall provide v-belt guards for each v-belt drive or other hazardousdrive. The guard shall enclose the drive entirely and shall have a hole for taking atachometer reading.

1.28 LABELING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. All mechanical equipment (A/C units, air handlers, fan coil units, fan powered boxes,water heaters, etc.) furnished under Division 23 of contract documents shall belabeled with permanent laminated plate secured to equipment. Units shall belabeled as indicated on plans and schedules.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)






PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work in this section includes furnishing and installing all piping forproject as hereinafter described.

B. Related Work: All piping shall be coordinated with Plumbing, Air Conditioning andVentilation section of these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. Refrigerant lines and condensate drain lines shall be ACR hard copper pipe andfittings.

2.2 PIPE FITTINGS

A. All pipe fittings shall be same as piping specified unless indicated otherwise.

B. All screwed fittings and pipe shall have threads cut to standard pipe threaddimensions. Pipe shall be properly reamed after cutting of threads.

C. Joint compound, Crane Thread lubricant or equal, shall be applied to male threadsof the screwed pipe and fittings only.

D. Approved expansion joints or flexible couplings shall be provided as necessary.

E. Care shall be taken in making up pipe and fittings such that pipe does not extendinto fitting sufficiently to reduce the waterway.

F. Unions for use on above grade pipe larger than 2 inches shall be cast iron, screwedflanges, 125 pound flat face with 1/16" non-asbestos composition gasket.

G. All risers 3" or larger shall have a flanged joint at each floor.

H. Standard, one-piece reducing fittings of approved design shall be used wherevera change in size is made. Changes in pipe sizes shall not be made by means ofreducing flanges.





2.3 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORTS

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required for hisequipment unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

B. This Contractor shall furnish and install all escutcheons, inserts, thimbles, hangers,etc. required for the proper support and installation of his equipment and piping. Cooperate with other trades in locating and placing these items.

C. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through walls, floors, beams, etc. Sleevespassing through structural members shall be of cast iron or Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves passing through non-structural walls or floors shall be of 26 gaugegalvanized iron. Joints between sleeves andpipes passing through floors shall be made watertight with plastic materials. Wherepipes pass through waterproofing membrane, flashing sleeves shall be installed.

D. Provide Grinnell # 108, Fee and Mason Fig. 57, Carpenter & Patterson # 34,Michigan # 450, or equal malleable iron split ring hangers with rod supports throughout. Strap hangers or wire will not be accepted. Maximum spacing of hangers for castiron pipes shall be 5'; for other than soil, use 10'.

E. Provide galvanized iron shields between hangers and pipe covering.

F. Provide Grinnell, Fee and Mason, Crane, or equivalent heavy steel riser clamps onvertical risers at floors to support pipes.

G. Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons wherever pipes pass through floors, wallsor ceilings in exposed or finished areas.

H. All piping projecting from chases shall be rigidly supported in the wall or chase. Loosely supported fixtures or accessories will not be accepted.

2.4 MOTORS, STARTERS, AND ELECTRICAL WORK

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the Electrical Contractor forinstallation, all the motor starters, start-stop switches and pilot lights for eachpiece of motor driven equipment unless shown otherwise.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall install all motor starters, start-stop switches andpilot lights as furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. The Electrical Contractorshall also do all power wiring required for the installation of such mechanicalequipment.





C. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install equipment interlocking,control wiring, etc., as hereinafter specified under Temperature Controls. Allwork shall be done in accordance with the National Electric Code requirements. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all work toprovide a complete system in working order.

D. All electrical equipment shall have the U.L. Label and shall meet the standardsof the National Electrical Code and NEMA.

E. All motors for the mechanical equipment shall be of the 40oC rise type and shallbe furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. All motors shall bewound for plus or minus 10% of the specified voltage. Motors ½ HP and smallershall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 cycle. Motors above ½ HP shall be thevoltages as indicated on the Drawings. All motors shall be PREMIUMEFFICIENCY type with a minimum motor efficiency of: 1,1.5 and 2 HP-84%; 3HP-85%; 5 HP-87%; 7.5 and 10 HP-89%; 15 HP-90%; 20 HP-91%; 25 and 30HP-92%; 40 HP-93%. Contractor shall submit certification after project iscomplete indicating minimum motor efficiency requirement has been met. Allmotors shall be rated for inverter duty.

F. Mechanical contractor shall furnish magnetic type starters for all motorsregardless of horse power and phase.

G. Exception: Manual starters can be furnished for fractional horsepower motorsthat are not controlled automatically or remotely. Refer to Section 15800(Temperature Control) and mechanical drawings to determine if fractionalhorsepower motors are controlled automatically or remotely.

H. SINGLE PHASE AC FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL STARTERS - 1HPOR LESS FHP manual starters shall be Square D Class 2150 or Allen BradleyBulletin 600.

1. The manual starters shall consist of a manually operated toggle switch equippedwith melting alloy type thermal overload relay. Thermal unit shall be of one-piececonstruction and interchangeable. Starter shall be inoperative if thermal unit isremoved. Contacts shall be double break, silver alloy visible from both sides ofstarter.

2. All FHP MANUAL STARTERS shall be double-pole type with one thermaloverload relay and general purpose enclosure and red pilot light.

I. SINGLE AND THREE PHASE AC MAGNETIC STARTERS - LINE VOLTAGETYPE (ALL MOTORS BELOW 10 HP





1. Motor starters shall be Square "D" Class 8536 or Allen Bradley Bulletin 509. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance withNEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted ingeneral purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on plans.

2. Across-the-line magnetic starters through NEMA Size seven shall be equippedwith double break silver alloy contacts. Single break contacts shall be suppliedon Size eight. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiringor removing starter from panel. The starter must have straight-through wiring.

3. Coils shall be of molded construction through NEMA Size seven. Coils on sizeeight starters shall be form wound, taped, varnished and baked. All coils shallbe replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel.

4. Overload relays shall be them letting alloy type with a replaceable control circuitmodule. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.

5. NEMA Size 0 thru 7 starters shall be suitable for the addition of at least fourexternal auxiliary contracts of any arrangement normally open or normally closed;Sizes 0-7 external auxiliary contacts shall be field convertible. Size 00 and Size8 starters shall be suitable for the addition of up to three external auxiliarycontacts of any arrangement normally open or normally closed. A minimum oftwo auxiliary contacts (one normally open and one normally closed) shall beprovided.

J. Single and Three-Phase Starter:

1. All magnetic starters shall be equipped with a "HAND-OFF-AUTO" SELECTORSWITCH, A RED RUN PILOT LIGHT, and a control circuit transformer with twofuses in primary circuit and one fuse in secondary. Control voltage shall becoordinated with other trades.

K. Three Phase Starters:

1. All three phase starters shall be equipped with an individual phase relay forprotection against phase failures, phase voltage unbalance, and phase reversal. This relay shall have a response delay adjustable from ½ to 1 second and anadjustable unbalance voltage level of 5 of 30%.





L. REDUCED VOLTAGE AC MAGNETIC STARTERS - (ALL MOTORS 10 HP ANDABOVE)

1. All starters for motors 10 HP and above shall be autotransformer type containinga starter and contactors with a vertically actuated magnet and armatureassembly, and horizontally actuated contacts through NEMA Size 4, contacts, onNEMA Size 5 through NEMA size 7.

2. The controller will be supplied for use on an electrical system as indicated ondrawings.

3. The Reduced Voltage Starter will be sized to control horsepower, as indicated ondrawings.

4. The Reduced Voltage Starter shall be Square "D" Class 8606 or Allen BradleyBelletin 570 and shall have the following features: hand-off-automatic selectorswitch, pilot light (red), control circuit transformer with two fuses in the primarycircuit, and one fuse in the secondary circuit. Control voltage shall becoordinated with other trades.

M. All three phase starters shall be equipped with an individual phase relay forprotection against phase failures, phase voltage unbalance, and phase reversal. This relay shall have a response delay of approximately 3 seconds. After eitherthe undervoltage or voltage unbalance limits are exceeded.

REFER TO DESCRIPTION OF MAGNETIC STARTERS FOR DETAILSREGARDING CONTACTORS AND STARTERS INTERNAL TO THIS DEVICE.

N. Refer to electrical plans and provide combination starters and disconnects whererequired.

O. All starters which are to be energized from remote "start-stop" stations shall beequipped with a step-down transformer to 120 volts.

2.5 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish and install access panels where valves, drains, dampers, etc. areconcealed in walls, ceilings, or floors, or otherwise inaccessible. Panels shall beMilcor, or equivalent, sized as required and furnished with prime coat finish.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. All Division 23 specifications, drawings, and general provisions of thecontract apply to work of this section, as do other documents referredto in this section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall obtain the services of an independent Test andBalance Company which specializes in the testing and balancing of heating,ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems to test, adjust and balance allHVAC systems in the construction area.

B. The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and toolsrequired in testing, adjusting and balancing the HVAC systems, as described inthese specifications or shown on accompanying drawings. Services shall includechecking equipment performance, taking the specified measurements, andrecording and reporting the results.

C. Representatives of the Test and Balance Company shall visit the job site at 90%completion of installation of the HVAC equipment, piping and ductwork to review theinstallation. After each site visit, the Test and Balance Company shall report to theArchitect any items that are not installed properly, are missing from the ContractDocuments or items that are required to enable him to perform the testing andbalancing of the HVAC systems as per normal standard practice. After review, theArchitect shall of the HVAC systems as per normal standard practice. After review,the Architect shall instruct the Contractor to implement the recommendations at noadditional cost to the Owner if these items were specified in the original scope of theproject.

D. Upon completion of the HVAC system installation, the Test and Balance Companyshall perform all required testing and balancing with the full cooperation of theContractor and his Sub-contractors. The Contractor shall make changes and/oradjustments to the HVAC system components that are required by the Test andBalance Company to accomplish proper balancing. The TAB agency shall notsupply or install any materials or balancing devices such as pulleys, drives, belts,etc. All of this work by the Contractor shall be performed at no additional cost to theOwner.

E. The test and balance report shall be submitted to the Architect for review by hisMechanical Engineer. If the Mechanical Engineer agrees with the report, he shall





meet with the Test and Balance Company to determine what needs to be done toobtain a properly balanced system.

F. After the Mechanical Engineer signs the testing and balancing report, the Test andBalance Company shall supply four (4) copies of the final and complete report to theArchitect for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

G. The items requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing include (but are not restrictedto) the following:

1.3 AIR SYSTEMS

A. Supply Fan AHU

B. Exhaust Fans, Fresh Air Fans

C. Zone branch and main ducts

D. Diffusers, Registers, Grilles and Dampers

E. Coils (Air Temperatures)

F. Vibration Isolators

1.4 DEFINITIONS, REFERENCES, STANDARDS

A. All work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air BalanceCouncil (AABC) National Standards or the latest standards of the NationalEnvironmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). If these contract documents set forthmore stringent requirements than the AABC National Standards or the NEBBStandards, these contract documents shall prevail.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency Qualifications: The TAB Agency shall be a current member of the AABC orthe NEBB.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualifications: The TAB agency shall submit a company resume listing personneland project experience in air and hydronic system balancing and a copy of theagency’s test and balance engineer (TBE) certificate.

B. Procedures and Agenda: The TAB agency shall submit the TAB procedures andagenda proposed to be used.





C. Sample Forms: The TAB agency shall submit sample forms, which shall include theminimum data required by the AABC National Standards or the NEBB Standards.

1.7 TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATION

A. Shop drawings, submittal data, up-to-date revisions, change orders, and other datarequired for planning, preparation, and execution of the TAB work shall be providedwhen available and no later than 30 days prior to the start of the TAB work.

B. System installation and equipment startup shall be complete prior to the TABagency’s being notified to begin.

C. The building control system (BCS) contractor shall provide and install the controlsystem, including all temperature, pressure and humidity sensors. These shall becalibrated for accurate control. If applicable, the BCS contractor shall install allnecessary computers and computer programs, and make these operational. Assistance shall be provided as required for reprogramming, coordination, andproblem resolution.

D. All test points, balancing devices, identification tags, etc., shall be accessible andclear or insulation and other obstructions that would impede TAB procedures.

E. Qualification installation or startup personnel shall be readily available for theoperation and adjustment of the systems. Assistance shall be provided as requiredfor coordination and problem resolution.

F. If, upon commencing the work, the TAB contractor finds that the systems are notready, or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the TAB contractormay request an inspection to be made by the Designer’s Mechanical Engineer. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented parties whetheror not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Itemsthat are determined to be not ready for testing and balancing shall be completed bythe Mechanical Contractor and placed in operational readiness before TAB servicesare again requested.

1.8 REPORTS

A. Final TAB Report - The TAB agency shall submit the final TAB report for review bythe Architect. On plans provide, all outlets, devices, HVAC equipment, etc., shallbe identified, along with a numbering system corresponding to report unitidentification. The TAB agency shall submit an AABC “National ProjectPerformance Guaranty” (or similar NEBB Guarantee) assuring that the projectsystems were tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the projectspecifications and AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards).





B. Submit 4 copies of the Final TAB Report to the Architect for inclusion in theOperation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.9 INSTRUMENTATION

A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with therequirements of AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards).

1.10 EXECUTION

A. GENERAL

1. The specified systems shall be reviewed and inspected for conformance todesign documents. Testing, adjusting and balancing on each identifiedsystem shall be performed. The accuracy of measurements shall be inaccordance with AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards). Adjustment tolerances shall be + or - 10% unless otherwise stated.

2. Equipment settings, including manual damper quadrant positions, valveindicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices shallbe marked to show final settings.

3. All information necessary to complete a proper TAB project and report shallbe per AABC or NEBB standards unless otherwise noted. The descriptionsof work required, as listed in this section, are a guide to the minimuminformation needed.

4. TAB contractor shall cut insulation, ductwork and piping for installation oftest probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequateperformance of procedures. Upon completion, patch insulation, ductworkand housings using materials identical to those removed. Seal insulation toreestablish integrity of the vapor barrier.

5. TAB work shall include additional inspection and adjustment of componentsduring the season following the initial balance to include re-balance of anyitems influenced by seasonal changes or as directed by the Owner.

1.11 AIR SYSTEMS

A. The TAB agency shall verify that all ductwork, splitters, extractors, dampers, grilles,registers, and diffusers have been installed per design, are functional and set fullopen. Any leakage in the ductwork shall be repaired prior to the test. The TABagency shall perform the following TAB procedures in accordance with the AABCNational Standards or NEBB Standards:





B. For Supply Fans:

1. Fan speeds - Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFMrequirements.

2. Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, andcompare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in orabove the service factor.

3. Pitot-Tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply andreturn ducts, as applicable to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is notpractical an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on theappropriate data sheet.

4. Outside Air - Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment usinga Pitot-tube traverse. If a traverse is not practical, an explanation of why atraverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. If atraverse is not practical use the mixed-air temperature method if the insideand outside temperature difference is at least 20 degrees Fahrenheit or usethe difference between Pitot-tube traverses of the supply and return airducts.

5. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressure, including the staticpressure profile of each supply fan.

C. For Exhaust Fans and Fresh Air Fans:

1. Fan speeds - test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements.2. Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and

compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure motor is not in or abovethe service factor.

3. Pitot-Tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main exhaust ductsto obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, an explanationof why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet.

4. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressure, including the staticpressure profile of each exhaust fan.

D. For Zone, Branch and Main Ducts:

1. Adjust ducts to within design CFM requirements. As applicable, at least onezone balancing damper shall be completely open. Multi-diffuser branchducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open.

E. For Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:

1. Tolerances - Test, adjust, and balance each diffuser, grille, and register towithin 10% of design requirements. Minimize drafts include required CFM,initial test CFM and final CFM.





2. Identification - Identify the type, location, and size of each grille, diffuser,and register. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets.

F. For Coils:

1. Air Temperature - Once air flows are set to acceptable limits, take wet bulband dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of eachcooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering andleaving side of each heating coil.

1.12 INDOOR AIR QUALITY VERIFICATION

A. The Tab agency shall take measurements at minimum outside air. It shall measuretemperature and humidity uniformity throughout the space, check filter installationfor proper fit, seal, and operation, and verify condensate drain operation. The TABagency shall note any water damage or obvious contamination sources from insideor outside.

B. The TAB agency shall conduct the following air sampling tests using TWA limitsshown in ASHRAE Standard 62-1989, Table C-1:1. Carbon Dioxide - Air Handling Unit

C. The TAB agency shall prepare a short report showing the results and location ofeach test, a summary of the HVAC operating conditions, and a listing of anydiscrepancies.

1.13 ADDITIONAL TAB SERVICES

A. Job Site Inspections: During construction, the TAB agency shall inspect theinstallation of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls, and othercomponent parts of the HVAC systems. Inspections shall be conducted a minimumof two times. (Typically, these are performed when 60% of the total system isinstalled and again when 90% of the total system is installed, prior to insulation ofthe duct and piping). The TAB agency shall submit a written report of eachinspection to the Architect.

B. Verification of HVAC Controls: The TAB agency shall be assisted by the buildingcontrol systems contractor in verifying the operation and calibration of all HVAC andtemperature control systems. The following tests shall be conducted:

1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with projectrequirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, dampersequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats, and other safetydevices.





2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for designoperating conditions.

C. Temperature Testing: To verify system control and operation, a series of threetemperature tests shall be taken at approximately two-hour intervals in eachseparately controlled zone. The resulting temperatures shall not vary more than twodegrees Fahrenheit from the thermostat or control set point during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity shall also be recorded during the testing periods.

D. TAB Report Verification: At the time of final inspection, the TAB agency may berequired to recheck, in the presence of the owner’s representative, specific andrandom selections of data, air quantities, and air motion recorded in the certified report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the owner’srepresentative. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as approvedfor the initial work for the certified report. Selections for recheck, specific plusrandom, will not exceed 10% of the total number tabulated in the report.

E. Fire and Smoke Testing: The TAB agency shall test fire/smoke dampers to assureoperation. It shall verify that an access door has been installed for each fire andsmoke damper. For fire dampers, the TAB agency shall open the access door,disconnect the fusible link, and allow the damper to close. Operation should besmooth and the damper must close completely. The TAB agency shall then resetthe damper.

F. For the smoke damper, the TAB agency shall open the access door, activate thedamper, and observe operation. The damper must close quickly and completely. The TAB agency shall then reset the damper and observe its complete opening.

G. Life Safety Controls: The TAB agency shall test and record life safety controloperation of the HVAC equipment. It shall verify the installation of required smokedetectors in air handling equipment (AHE), and shall verify operation of the smokedetector by activating the smoke detector and observing air handler shutdown. Withthe controls and alarm contractors, the TAB agency shall verify the operation ofinterconnected systems such as the AHE smoke detector’s activation of the firealarm system and the alarm system’s activation of the life safety control sequences.






PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Pipe insulation shall not begin until all work has been tested andfound to be tight. All insulation adhesives, sealers, tapes and masticshall meet the latest NFPA requirements and shall meet 25/50/50flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

B. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations.

C. All pipe insulation exterior of building shall be banded with aluminum bands,three to a section and with one band on each side of each fitting, valve, etc.

D. Insulation shall be continuous through walls and ceilings.

E. All valves, strainers, etc. shall be insulated the same as its adjacent piping andthe covering shall extend all the way up to the equipment.

F. USE HIGH DENSITY INSULATION INSERTS AT HANGERS ON ALL PIPING 1-1/2" AND ABOVE TO PREVENT CRUSHING OF INSULATION.

1.2 THERMAL INSULATION: After all work has been tested and approved, insulate as

follows:

A. INSULATION SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THEMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

1.3 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. Insulate with 1/2" Aerotube or Armaflex pipe insulation applied in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Tape all joints.

1.4 REFRIGERANT LINES

A. Insulate with 3/4" closed cell, tube insulation, Aerotube, Armaflex or equivalent. Apply two coats of weatherproof mastic on all piping below grade or exposed toweather.





1.5 HVAC DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Low pressure supply ductwork, return air ductwork, fresh air, and exhaustductwork shall be wrapped on outside with 2.33" thick 3/4# density fiberglassinsulation with aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be taped at all jointsand installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Refer to air distribution section of mechanical specifications for low pressure ductinsulation supplied by the sheet metal sub-contractor.

C. Transfer ductwork across walls shall be internally lined with 1" thick acousticalinsulation.

1.6 HVAC FLEX-CONNECTIONS

A. Shall be wrapped on outside with 2.33" thick 3/4 # density fiberglass insulationwith aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be taped at all joints andinstalled per the manufacturer's recommendations.

1.7 INSULATION THROUGH HANGERS AND SLEEVES

A. The insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers and pipe sleeves. Athangers where the pipe is supported by insulation, provide a galvanized ironprotection shield. Provide pipes 2-inch i.p.s. and larger with insulation inserts atpoints of hanger supports. The inserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass,prestressed molded glass fiber of minimum 13-pound density, or other approvalmaterial of the same thickness as adjacent insulation and not less than 13-pounddensity. The inserts shall have sufficient compression strength to adequatelysupport the pipe without compressing the inserts to a thickness less than theadjacent insulation. Inserts shall be 180 degrees and not less than the length ofthe protection shield. Vapor barrier facing of the insert shall be the same as thefacing on the adjacent insulation. Where copper clad hanger are used ondomestic copper pipe, insulation may cover pipe and hanger.

1.8 WASTE LINE P-TRAPS

A. P-traps receiving HVAC condensate (exposed to weather or above ceilings) shallbe insulated with 2-1/8" thick 3/4 # density fiberglass ductwrap insulation withaluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be sealed at all seams and joints.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA TEMPERATURE CONTROLS



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Provide an electric temperature Control system by Trane, Honeywell,Johnson, Barber Coleman, Robertshaw, Belimo or approved equal, tobe installed by the Mechanical Contractor.

1.2 THERMOSTAT:

A. Provide fully automatic programmable room type thermostat with night setback perzone or as indicated on Plans to cycle compressor on cooling cycle, andcompressor and/or electric strips in stages on heating cycle as required to maintainspace conditions. Unit shall be wired for constant or automatic fan operation andshall be electrically interlocked such that the compressor may not run nor theelectric strip heaters be energized unless the evaporator fan is operating. Thermostat shall be complete with fan "Auto-On" switch and system "Auto-Heat-Off-Cool" switch.

1.3 FIRESTAT:

A. Provide manual reset firestat in return air to each air handling unit. Firestat shallstop associated fan on a rise in air temperature above 125EF.

1.4 SMOKE DETECTOR:

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install a smoke detector in the supplyand return duct of all air handling systems delivering 2000 C.F.M. or greater andshall be interlocked to de-energize fan on actuation of detector.

B. Smoke detectors shall have auxiliary contacts for interlock with the fire alarmsystem. Coordinate installation and selection of smoke detectors. Entire installationshall meet UL requirements for interlock with building fire alarm and securitysystem.

C. Provide remote audible and visual alarm unit (one per AHU with smoke detector)in accordance with latest N.F.P.A. 90A requirements.

D. Dual-chamber, ionization smoke detectors: The combination detector head andtwist-lock base shall be UL listed compatible with a UL listed fire alarm panel.

E. The smoke detector shall have a flashing status indication LED or visualsupervision. When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED shall latch on steadyand at full brilliance. The detector may be reset by activating the control panel resetswitch.





F. The sensitivity of the detector shall be monitored without removal of the detectorhead. Metering setting points shall be accessible on the exterior of the detectorhead. Field adjustment for the sensitivity shall be possible when conditions requirea change.

G. It shall be possible to perform a functional test of the detector without the need ofgenerating smoke. The test method must simulate effects of products ofcombustion in the chamber to ensure testing of all detector circuits.

H. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed to minimizefalse alarm potential. A gated alarm output shall be used for additional detectorstability.

I. Auxiliary SPDT relays and/or remote LED alarm indicators shall be installed asrequired.

J. Duct mounted smoke detectors shall shut down the associated air handling unit fanmotor an fire/smoke damper. This contractor shall provide all equipment and laboras required to accomplish same.

1.5 FLOAT SWITCH:

A. Provide float switch to emergency drain pan of each AHU. Switch shall beinterlocked with AHU to de-energize the unit when the water level in the pan risesabove a set level.

1.6 MOTORIZED DAMPERS:

A. O.A. motorized dampers shall be interlocked with A/C units in respectivemechanical rooms to open when any A/C unit is "on" and closed when all A/C unitsare "off". Provide all necessary relays, switches, transformers, etc. as required.

B. Motorized dampers shall be furnished and set in place by contractor installing theductwork.

C. Damper actuators shall be 120/1/60 electric actuators specifically selected fordamper manufacturer's requirements. Controls contractor shall furnish and installactuators. Coordinate all work with contractor installing dampers.

D. Damper actuators shall have maximum 40 dBA sound power levels in driving andreturn modes.

1.7 CONTROL WIRING:

A. All wiring required in the control systems, including electrical connections for thethermostats, firestats, smoke detectors, exhaust fans and all interlocking motor





control wiring shall be furnished and installed by Mechanical Contractor.

B. All wiring shall be in conduit and in accordance with the National Electrical Code(N.E.C.).

C. All control wiring located outdoors shall be installed in rigid or intermediate metalconduit.

D. All control wiring located indoors where an accessible ceiling is not available shallbe installed in E.M.T. conduit.

E. All control wiring located above accessible ceilings shall be N.E.C. approved cable. All control wiring located above accessible ceilings used as air plenums shall beN.E.C. approved "plenum cable".

F. All conductors shall be copper. Conductors used for power circuits shall be #12 TWminimum. Conductors used for control circuits shall be #14 TW minimum. Conductors used for sensor circuits shall be #18 TW minimum.

1.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING INTERLOCK:

A. The control sub-contractor shall make complete and coordinated interlock wiringand supervisory central system wiring diagrams. The sub-contractor shall obtainthe necessary diagrams from the successful manufacturer and shall completelycoordinate the interlock diagram.

B. Interlocks by control contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Interlock all cooling A/C units with respective motorized fresh air intakes. Modify as required for morning start-up sequence.

2. Interlock all firestats with respective fans or air units.3. Provide manual reset "kill-switch" in drainpan at each air handler to be wired

to stop respective unit upon rise of water in drain pan.4. Interlock smoke detectors in supply ducts at respective units.

1.9 EXHAUST FANS:

A. Exhaust fans shall be interlocked with respective occupancy sensors or restroomlight switches as stated on the exhaust fan schedule through the local speed controlswitch. Speed control switch shall be installed above the ceiling for adjustment tothe fan and shall be utilized to balance the exhaust system.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA AIR DISTRIBUTION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all ducts for Air Conditioning, Heating and VentilatingSystem as shown on the plans and as may be required to providecomplete system. Ductwork shall be complete with grilles, vanes,flashings, hangers, flexible connections, splitters, dampers, fresh air inlets, louvers,reinforcing angles, etc. All ductwork shall be concealed and insulated as hereinafterspecified. All ductwork indicated on drawings shall be metal-to-metal outsidedimensions.

1.2 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. All ductwork shall be properly braced to prevent rattling, breathing or otherunnecessary noise. No sharp edges or obstructions shall project into the airstream. (1" wide x 16 gauge minimum)

1.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. All ductwork for constant air units shall be galvanized steel and shall be of gaugesand construction as recommended by ASHRAE Guide and Data Book. Gauges areas follows, with longest side governing.1. Dimensions of longest side Sheet Metal Gauge

0"-12" 26 Gauge13"-30" 24 Gauge31"-54" 22 Gauge55"-84" 20 Gauge

B. Joints and reinforcing shall be as per ASHRAE Guide and Data Book and all slipsshall be installed without edge of internal part of slip facing downstream.

C. All joints shall be sealed with hard cast FTA adhesive and hardcast DT 5300 tape.

D. Construction standards of Article 110 of the National Board of Fire Underwriters,Bulletin 90, latest edition, shall apply throughout.

E. Flashings shall be sheet copper, and shall be furnished and installed around alloutside openings used for ducts of fans and wherever required. Roof flashings shallextend at least 8" above roof.

F. All ducts shall be straight and true and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.





G. All edges shall be straight and true, and all bends shall be made with vaned turns. Where long radius turns cannot be used, the Contractor shall use square turns anduse air splitters spaced not more than 3" center to center, and of a length so air willbe properly distributed over the ducts.

1.4 ROUND DUCTWORK

A. Shall be constructed of 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal with screwed and tapedjoints or snap lock joints.

B. At contractor's option, pre-insulated flexible ductwork (R-6) as manufactured byThermaflex Model MKE, Flexmaster 8M or prior approved equal may be used toconnect to ceiling diffusers (maximum 6'-0" length). Quietflex Series 80 andThermaflex Model KM are not approved.

C. Flexible duct shall be maximum 4' in length, properly installed tight and straight withhangers and no sagging or kinks. Provide hard round snap lock duct wrapped withinsulation for all runs greater than 6' in length. Any flexible duct runs 6' or less shallonly be used for straight runs. Any turns shall have hard round elbows at spin infittings prior to running flexible duct.

D. Insulated Acoustical Low Pressure Flexible Duct Specification:

1. The duct shall be constructed of a CPE fabric supported by helical woundgalvanized steel. UL181 Class I Air Duct. Fabric shall be mechanicallylocked to the steel helix without the use of adhesives or chemicals. Theinternal working pressure rating shall be at least 6" w.g. positive and 4" w.g.negative with a bursting pressure of at least 2½ time the working pressure.The duct shall be rated for a velocity of at least 4000 feet per minute. Theduct must be suitable for continuous operation at a temperature range of-20° F to +250° F. Factory insulate the flexible duct with fiberglassinsulation. The R value shall be at least 6.0 at a mean temperature of 75°F. (R-4.2 is not acceptable) Cover the insulation with a fire retardantmetalized vapor barrier jacket reinforced with crosshatched scrim having apermeance of not greater than 0.05 perms when tested in accordance withASTM E96, Procedure A. All flex connections to ceiling diffusers must beconnected with an insulated square to round box.

1.5 DUCTWORK SEALANT

A. All ductwork shall be air tight. All seams, both shop made and field installed, andshall be sealed with tape and glue. All transverse joints shall be sealed as well asspin collar takeoffs and rough duct connections. All duct connections and seams





shall be sealed with a UL approved non-flammable tape and mastic system. Strict adherence to manufacturers installation instruction is required. The duct sealantshall be equal to Hardcast FTA20/DT5300, United McGill Unit-Sealer Tape andGlue or 3M Company Sealing System.

1.6 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Dampers of the fusible link operated type shall be provided in all ductwork passingthrough the floor or firewalls. In all cases, the time rating of damper shall be equalto or greater than the time rating of the wall.

B. Provide quadrant or adjustable splitters and mark shaft to give position of splitterdamper in duct.

C. Provide vanes behind every supply grille or diffuser. Splitters shall be providedwhere shown on Plans and where located in concealed, non-accessible space,provide Young Regulators to operate splitter. Vanes shall be Tuttle and Bailey"Ducturns", Barber Coleman Uniflo or equivalent. Shop fabricated vanes will beacceptable. All dampers shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel.

1.7 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

A. Square or rectangular ceiling supply outlets, unless noted otherwise, shall beAnemostat, Metalaire, Price, Titus or equal, as indicated in schedules. Color shallbe white. Grilles shall be of aluminum construction with baked enamel finish. Where noted on plans, grilles with the fire dampers in ceiling shall be steelconstruction with fire rated blanket behind grille as required by grille type scheduled.

B. All wall supply grilles shall be complete with horizontal and vertical adjustabledeflectors and opposed blade volume control damper. Grilles shall bemanufactured by Titus, Anemostat, Metalaire, Price or prior approved equivalent.

C. Return air grilles shall be as manufactured by Anemostat, Metalaire, Titus, Price orequivalent, and shall be of the style called for on the Plans. Provide filters in filterback grilles.

D. All supply outlets shall have a sponge rubber gasket.

E. "Stamped" grilles and diffusers are not approved.

F. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, all grilles installed in walls and doors shall befurnished with prime coat finish suitable for painting by painting sub-contractor.

1.8 MOTORIZED DAMPERS





A. Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install motorized dampers at outdoorintakes as indicated on mechanical and architectural drawings. Damper shall beparallel blade motorized type equivalent to Ruskin CD36/PB, Arrow Series 1770, orequal. Motorized dampers shall be operated by 120/1/60 electric actuator asindicated on plans. Damper shall be complete with outboard support bearing, bladeand jamb seals. Dampers shall be low - leakage type.

1.9 FILTERS

A. Unless noted otherwise, AHU filter media shall be 1" thick and of the non-wovencotton fabric type. The filter media shall have an average efficiency of 25-30% onASHRAE Test Standard 52-76. It shall have an average arrestance of 90-92% inaccordance with that test standard. Media support grid shall be a welded wire gridwith an effective open area not less than 96%. The welded wire grid shall bebonded to the filter media to eliminate the possibility air bypass. Filters shall be Farr30/30 or A.A.F. AM 300.

B. Provide one (1) set of filters for start-up and replace with new set after building isturned over to owner.

C. Provide one (1) additional set of filters for every piece of equipment to owner forstock.

1.10 DUCT ACCESS PANELS

A. Access panel shall be Flexmaster “Inspector Series” Model SDSM low leakage spin-in access door. Door shall be 1" insulated type and shall be 24 gauge steel with 24gauge steel frame. A continuous 3/8" wide by 3/16" thick open cell adhesiveneoprene gasket shall be installed in the door frame to provide a positive seal uponinsertion and locking of door. The door shall be held secure with every spaced castaluminum cam latches for even pressure against the gasket.

1.11 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Mechanical contractor shall furnish and install manual dampers at outdoor airintakes and in other rectangular ductwork as indicated on plans. Damper shall becomplete with outboard support bearing, and manual locking quadrant lever forbalancing, blade and jamb seals.

B. Manual balancing dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnishedand installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampersshall consist of: a 16 ga galvanized steel hat channel frame with 5 in depth; tripleV type blades fabricated from 16 ga galvanized steel; 0.5 india. plated steel axles;external (out of the airstream) blade-to-blade linkage. Damper manufacturer'sprinted application and performance data including pressure, velocity and





temperature limitations shall be submitted for approval showing damper suitable forpressures to 4 in wg, velocities to 2,000 ft/min and temperatures to 180 F. Testingand ratings to be in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Basis of design isGreenheck's Model MBD-15, Nailor 1022, Ruskin MBD-35.

C. Manual balancing damper and motorized damper sizes shall be 6” in height. Transition 4” high fresh air ductwork to standard manual and motorized dampersizes.

1.12 SPIN COLLARS:

A. All round low pressure connections to rectangular ducts shall be made with a factoryfabricated spin collar fitting with damper and constructed of minimum 26 gagalvanized steel. The damper shall have a 2” raised handle with a high qualitylocking quadrant. A 3/8” continuous rod with “U” bolts connects the damper to therod. Nylon end bearings are required where the rod penetrates the spin collarbarrel. Provide Dace #SM-7 SPININ-W/SOLQ-CR, Flexmaster #FLD-B03, or priorapproved equal. A sample must be submitted for engineer’s approval prior toinstallation.

1.13 DUCT ACCESS PANELS

A. Access panel shall be Flex Master “Inspector Series” Model SDSM low leakagespin-in access door. Door shall be 1” insulated type and shall be 24 gauge steelwith 24 gauge steel frame. A continuous 3/8” wide by 3/16” thick open cell adhesiveneoprene gasket shall be installed in the door frame to provide a positive seal uponinsertion and locking of door. The door shall be held secure with every spaced castaluminum cam latches for even pressure against the gasket.

1.14 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install, at locations shown on Plans, fire dampers constructed andtested in accordance with UL Safety Standard 555. Each fire damper shall have fireprotection label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Dampermanufacturer's literature submitted for approval prior to installation shall includecomprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCAStandard 500, and shall illustrate pressure drops for all sizes of dampers requiredat all anticipated air flow rates. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical orhorizontal installation as required by the location shown.

B. Fire dampers shall be 100% free area and installed in wall openings utilizing steelsleeves, angles or other materials and practices required to provide an installationequivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers are tested by UL. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer's instructions. Firedampers shall be Ruskin Type DIBD, Style B, Air Balance or approved equivalent.







OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA HVAC EQUIPMENT



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The air conditioning system, in general, shall be for the entire building,providing cooling and dehumidification in summer and heating in winter. A constant amount of fresh air shall be taken into the systemand all air shall be filtered.

1.2 EMERGENCY DRAIN PAN

A. Provide an emergency drain pan for air units. The pan shall be constructed of18 gauge galvanized steel, extending 6" beyond unit all around and turning upa minimum of 4" around the perimeter. A 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" galvanized angleiron frame shall be welded around the top of the pan. Entire pan should bepainted with black asphalt rust preventative paint. Extend a Type "L" hard copperdrain line (minimum 1") as indicated on the drawings. Provide connection at lowpoint of pan and provide ball valve to drain pan.

B. Emergency drain pans for all water heaters shall be 20 gauge galvanized sheetmetal with sides of pan extending 4" above the bottom of the pan per detail.

1.3 LABELING EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be labeled with permanent laminated plate riveted to unit. Unitsshall be labeled as indicated in schedules. Plate shall be black with white unitnumbers. Height of unit number shall be minimum of one (1) inch. Label shall alsoindicate area serviced by unit as noted in schedules. Height of letters shall beminimum of one-half (1/2) inch. Submit sample to Architect for approval.

1.4 VENTILATING SYSTEM

A. Contractor shall furnish and install all exhaust fans shown and scheduled on Plans. Fans shall be of the type indicated in schedules.

B. All exhaust fans shall be equipped with bird screen, automatic back-draft dampersand integral disconnect switch unless noted otherwise. Fan motors shall be highefficiency type of the 40 deg C ambient temperature rise type and shall be suitable forcontinuous or inverter duty operation as required. The fan shall be U.L. listed.

C. Direct drive fans shall complete with solid state speed control switch mounted in unithousing. Switch shall be used for final balancing of the system.





D. In-line fans shall complete with inlet guide vanes with manual adjustable level whichshall be locked at final balanced position.

E. All roof mounted fans shall be complete with insulated roof curb. Curb shall becompatable with roofing manufacturer’s requirements. Coordinate requirementswith General Contractor and Roofing Manufacturer.

1.5 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. Furnish and install high-efficiency, air-cooled top discharge where shown and withcapacities scheduled. UNIT SHALL BE COMPLETELY FACTORY ASSEMBLED,PRE-CHARGED AND TESTED, AND SHALL BE SUPPLIED FROM THE

FACTORY WITH ALL FEATURES LISTED BELOW.

B. Condenser coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to analuminum coil and shall be protected with stamped louvered panels on outside ofunit.

C. Condenser fan shall be propeller type, direct driven. Motor shall have inherentprotection and be of the permanently lubricated type, resiliently mounted. Fansshall be complete with safety guards.

D. Compressor shall be a single speed serviceable hermetic or sealed hermetic designcomplete with crankcase heater and external spring isolators and compressors, andshall have a 5-year warranty. Unit shall be equipped with time delay to preventcompressor from starting within five minutes of "off" time.

E. All controls shall be factory wired and shall consist of condenser fan overloaddevices, hard start kit (single phase only), internal pressure relief valve, filter dryers,pressure taps for refrigerant check, quick connect refrigerant couplings and liquidand suction line service valves. Unit shall also be furnished with outdoor expansionvalve or metering valve and check valve.

F. Casing shall be fully weatherproof for outdoor installation and shall be bonderizedsteel with baked enamel finish. Panels shall be removable to provide access forservicing. Unit shall be set in place on rubber mounting pads.

G. Contractor shall advise the Electrical Contractor of the manufacturer'srecommended fuse size if different from that specified on the Electrical Drawings. Mechanical Contractor shall pay any additional costs required to change fuse sizes.

H. Unit shall be as manufactured by Trane, Lennox, Carrier, York or approvedequivalent.





1.6 HIGH EFFICIENCY AIR CONDITIONING UNIT - INDOOR SECTION

A. Furnish and install vertical discharge/bottom return, or horizontal type (as indicatedon plans) air conditioning unit of size, type and capacities as scheduled. Units shallbe Trane, Lennox, Carrier, York or approved equivalent.

B. Units shall be complete with fan, multi-speed direct drive blower, motor, directexpansion cooling coil, low voltage control transformer, grease fittings, drain pan,etc. All units shall be factory insulated on the interior with not less than 3/4# densityneoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with waterproof adhesive.

C. Each unit shall be mounted on a suitable base as indicated on plans or 24" highpainted angle iron base approved by the Engineer to allow for proper return air. Unit shall also be designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated staticpressure. Fan capacities shall be rated with the fans in the units, and thehorsepowers specified shall include all losses.

D. Casings shall be suitable for operation at the pressures specified and constructedof bonderized steel.

E. Cooling coils shall be of aluminum or copper and shall be tested at 400 psi airpressure. Cooling coil face velocity shall not exceed that guaranteed bymanufacturer for no moisture carry-over.

F. Electric strip heaters shall be as hereinafter specified and shall be mounted insideunit housing. Coordinate electric service to heaters and blower with ElectricalContractor. Heater and air unit shall be internally wired and fused to receive oneelectrical source of power.

G. Filter shall be 1" thick, pleated, throw-way mounted in an accessible factory filterrack at unit, or in R.A. ductwork as indicated on plans.

H. Contractor shall provide a new set of filters upon completion of project, to turnbuilding over to Owner.

I. If the manufacturer's equipment is not available internally wired to receive onesource of power, necessary modifications to electric service shall be theresponsibility of the equipment supplier. Any modifications required shall besubmitted in writing ten (10) days prior to the bid date.

1.7 ELECTRIC STRIP HEATERS

A. Electric strip heaters shall consist of open coils made from Grade "A" resistant wireinsulated by floating ceramic bushings and supported in an aluminum steel frame.





B. All terminal studs, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel, insulated with phenolicterminal bushings. Terminals shall be machine crimped to coils and heater shall betested at 2000 volts before shipment. All voltages and phases shall be asscheduled.

C. Heater shall be provided with built-in contactors, with one terminal block furnishedfor each circuit and separate contactors for each stage of heating. Heaters with airunits supplying 2000 CFM or less shall be internally wired with air unit to receive oneelectric source of power.

D. An automatic reset thermal cut-off shall be provided to break the heater load directlyon over-temperature. In addition, provide manual reset thermal cut-off to break theheater load manually.

E. Control circuit transformer shall be built into heater terminal box and sized to carryfull contactor holding coil load.

F. Heaters shall be listed by UL and shall be as manufactured by Chromalox, ElectricHeaters, Inc., Industrial Engineering and Equipment Co., or an approved equivalent.

G. Heater shall be equipped with built-in pressure type air flow switch. Heater shall bemounted inside unit housing.

H. Where indicated on drawings, heaters in ductwork shall be provided with ductflanges. Outside of heater shall be wrapped with 2" thick fiberglass ductwrap withaluminum foil vapor barrier.

1.8 TESTING REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Refrigerant lines shall be tested under 1.5 times the working pressure with carbondioxide pressure for 5 hours using soap suds at joints to test for leaks. Evacuatesystem and charge with refrigerant.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS



PART 1 - GENERAL ITEMS


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the

Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary,

and other Conditions, Division 0) and Division 1 as

appropriate, apply to the Work specified in this Section.

B. Refer to Division 26 , Electrical, as well as the Specifications for the other

various trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions

regarding electrical work.


A. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division are required to review

all contract documents including but not limited to Architectural drawings,

Structural drawings, Mechanical drawings, Plumbing drawings, Electrical

drawings, etc. to coordinate requirements and responsibilities with and

through prime bidder.

B. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by furnishing a bid on

a portion of the prime contract are indicating that they have received all

contract documents and coordinated services provided under their portion

of the work with the prime bidder; they are indicating that they have

expressed any pertinent questions (which would result from a detailed,

thorough review of the entire set of contract documents) to the prime

bidder in accordance with Division 1 requirements, prior to bidding.

C. All timely, pertinent, questions provided in writing prior to bids, in

accordance with Division 1 requirements, will be clarified, defined, or

otherwise explained in a written addendum and/or addendums prior to bids,

in accordance in Division 1 requirements.

D. It is not the intention of these contract documents to leave any issue relating

to coordination between trades or sub-contractors vaguely defined. The

intention is to define all issues, coordination matters, equipment

requirements, sizes, routing, etc. to the satisfaction of the prime bidder, prior

to receipt of bids.

E. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by virtue of the

submission of a bid to the prime bidder, are indicating that they have

reviewed the entire set of contract documents with due diligence and




regard for the Owner's desire for a comprehensive and complete bid

proposal; that they have expressed all concerns or questions requiring

clarification on matters of coordination between trades and/or sub-

contractors; that they have expressed any such concerns or questions in

writing in accordance with Division 1 requirements.


A. The term "provide" when used in the Contract Documents includes all items

necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

B. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product,

material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog

number, shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall

not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases,

may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or

type of construction which in the judgement of the Architect expressed in

writing is equal to that specified.

C. Coordinate and properly relate all Work of this Division to building structure

and work of all other trades.

D. Visit premises and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions; verify

all dimensions in field. Advise Architect of any discrepancies prior to Bid

Date in accordance with Division 0.

E. Do not rough-in for any item or equipment furnished by others or noted "Not

in Contract" (NIC), without first receiving rough-in information or determining

rough-in requirements from other trades and/or Architect.

F. Provide storage and protection for all equipment and materials in

accordance with requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. Replace any

equipment and materials damaged by improper handling, storage, or

protection, at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Keep premises clean in accordance with requirements of Division 0 and

Division 1.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions are only allowed by approval of the Architect/Engineer prior to

Bid Date. They shall be received by the Architect/Engineer 7 working days

prior to bid date. Submittals sent via facsimile or e-mail shall not be

acceptable.




B. Design of systems is based on specific equipment. If the use of other

manufacturer's equipment, even though approved by Architect, involves

additional cost due to space requirements, foundation requirements,

increased mechanical or electrical services, the cost of such extra work shall

be borne by manufacturer of substituted equipment. Even though a

manufacturer's name appears in the Contract Documents as having

acceptable equipment, his equipment shall be classified as being a

substitute to the equipment originally designed for and named in the

Contract Documents. Substitute equipment, materials, etc., will not be

allowed to deviate from Contract Document requirements.

C. The following equipment/systems shall be submitted for prior approval:

1. Lighting Fixtures

2. Gear

3. Floor Duct


A. The specific intent of these Contract Documents is to provide the various

systems, equipment, etc. to the Owner complete and in a thoroughly

calibrated and functional condition.

B. The Drawings shall not be construed as shop drawings. In the event of a

possible interference with piping or equipment of another trade, items

requiring set grade and elevations shall have precedence over other items.

Should any major interference develop, immediately notify the Architect.

C. In laying out Work, refer to mechanical, electrical, structural, and

architectural drawings at all times in order to avoid interference and undue

delays in the progress of the Work.


A. Work shall be in full accord with the LA Administrative Code, 2014 N.E.C.,

2012 IBC, local ordinances, building codes, and other applicable national,

local, and state regulations.

B. Equipment shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the

National Bureau of Fire Underwriters and National Fire Protection Association

(NFPA).

C. Items provided under this Division shall comply with the American National

Standards Institute (ANSI) "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities

Accessible to and




Usable by Physically Handicapped People," ANSI A 117.1, and the Americans

with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.).

D. In the possible event of conflict between codes or regulations and Contract

Documents, notify the Architect/Engineer immediately.


A. Obtain and pay for permits required for the Work of this Division. Pay fees in

connection therewith, including necessary inspection fees.

B. Pay any and all taxes levied for Work of this Division, including municipal

and/or state sales tax where applicable.


A. Install and operate equipment and material in strict accord with

manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. The manufacturer's

instructions shall become part of the Contract Documents and shall

supplement Drawings and Specifications.

1.9 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Submit shop drawings, project data, and samples in accordance with

requirements of Division 0/and or Division 1.

B. Shop drawings shall consist of published ratings or capacity data, detailed

construction drawings for fabricated items, wiring and control diagrams,

performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation

drawings, and other pertinent data. Submit drawings showing revisions to

equipment layouts due to use of alternate or substitute equipment.

C. Where approved manufacturers and suppliers of equipment, materials, etc.

are unable to fully comply with Contract Document requirements,

specifically call such deviations to attention of Architect on submittals. Type

deviations on a separate sheet; underlined statements or notations on

standard brochures, equipment fly sheets, etc. will not be accepted.

D. Approval of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing required

quantities and verifying dimensions. In addition, approval shall not waive

original intent of Contract Documents.

E. Failure to obtain written approval of equipment shall be considered

sufficient grounds for rejection of said equipment regardless of the stage of

completion of the project.




1.10 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Refer to applicable Division 26 Sections for products work of this Division.

B. Refer to Division 22 and 23 for related products affecting work of this section.

C. Coordinate handling of all products, materials, etc., through general

contractor. Coordinate space, access, clearances, etc., through general

contractor prior to preparation of shop drawing submittal.


A. Value Engineering (V/E) defined: For purposes of Division 22 and 23 and 26

Specifications, in accordance with all Division 1 Requirements and all Terms

and Conditions of proposed contract between Owner and Contractor,

Value Engineering (V/E) shall be defined as a “post bid” process, whereby

the apparent low bidder (having submitted a proposal in strict accordance

with Project Contract Documents, that exceeds the Owner’s available funds

for construction [AFC] for this specified project) offers proposed changes

(“Value Engineering”) to the work. This proposed value engineering may

alter or adjust aforementioned contract document requirements in

exchange for financial and/or other consideration (in response to a specific

request by the Owner/Owner’s Representative).

B. Value Engineering may not be considered, prior to scheduled receipt and

review of Bid Proposals by the Owner and an official written request from the

Owner/Owner’s Representative expressing the Owner’s desire to consider

value engineering items.

C. While it may be in the project Owner’s interest to consider the first cost

money saving that may be generated via alternatives and options

generated via participation in Value Engineering, Division 26 contractor shall

realize that substantive offers of Value Engineering (V/E), if accepted by the

Owner, constitute a design-build agreement (offer and acceptance) with

the owner, and drastically change the design concept of the project, as

developed by the Professional of Record identified on the Contract

Documents.

D. Should contractor offer, and the owner accept value engineering options

that alter aspects of the system design, equipment, performance and/or

performance verification or monitoring of respective systems, Division 26

contractor shall provide duly licensed professional engineering consultants

working on behalf of the Division 26 contractor (including sub-contractors

and equipment vendors/manufacturers) to review, approve and take

professional responsibility for performance and suitability of V/E hybrid




systems, materials or operational changes related to respective V/E items.

The Division 26 contractor’s licensed professional engineering consultants

and the Division 26 contractor assume any and all responsibility for the

design and suitability in terms of performance, of hybrid systems installed, as

Division 26 contractor’s Professional of Record, absolving the original project

Professional of Record (identified on the original Contract Documents,

released for the original project Bid/Negotiation) from responsibility for the

V/E hybrid systems portion of the work.

E. Division 26 contractor, via the offer and acceptance of value engineering

items on the project agrees to provide professional engineering design

services and take full and complete responsibility for the hybrid design.

Further, the Division 26 contractor’s (V/E Items)professional of record (either

employees, or independent consultants to the Division 26 contractor)

through the offer and acceptance of V/E items, agree to indemnify and

hold harmless the project owner, the owner’s original A/E team (Professional

of Record on behalf of the owner for the original Contract Documents) their

heirs and assigns in regard to the V/E changes and their impact on the

Division 26 systems altered, affected or modified, in whole or in part. The

Professional of Record shown on the original Contract Documents in regard

to the systems altered, adjusted, revised, modified or otherwise affected by

the value engineering items implemented, shall be absolved of design

responsibility as a result of implementation of V/E items, and their original use

of Engineering Seals used for original Contract Documents, shall not apply.


A. Keep Project Record Documents in accordance with requirements of

Division 0 and/or Division 1.

B. During construction period, keep accurate records of installations made

under this Division, paying particular attention to major interior and exterior

underground and concealed piping, ductwork, etc.

C. The Contractor shall obtain from the Prime Contractor a minimum of one (1)

set of the contract documents including all addenda and change orders as

prepared by the Architect/Engineer.

D. If the Contractor elects to vary from the Contract Documents and secures

prior approval from the Architect/Engineer for any phase of the work, he

shall record in a neat and readable manner all such variances on the

contract documents in red ink. Prior to requesting substantial completion

the marked-up set of contract documents shall be returned to the

Architect/Engineer for approval.




E. All deviations from sizes, locations and from all other features of the install-

ation shown in the Contract Documents shall be recorded.

F. In addition, it shall be possible using these drawings to correctly and easily

locate, identify and establish sizes of all piping, directions, and the like, as

well as other features of work which will be concealed underground and/or

in the finished building.

G. Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to

columns, lines or walls, locating all turns, etc. and by properly referenced

centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall.

H. For work concealed in the building, sufficient information shall be given so

it can be located with reasonable accuracy and ease. In some cases this

may be by dimension. In others, it may be sufficient to illustrate the work on

the drawings in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was

actually installed. The decision of the Architect/Engineer in this matter will

be final.

I. The following requirements apply to all Record Drawings:

1. They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense.

2. All such drawings shall be done carefully and neatly.

3. Additional drawings shall be obtained at the Contractor's expense.

4. They shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work

and shall be available upon request for examination by the

Architect/Engineer and when necessary, by other trades, to establish

clearances for other parts of the work.

5. Record Drawings shall be returned to the Architect/Engineer upon

completion of the work and are subject to approval of the Architect/

Engineer.

1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA for procedures and requirements for preparation and

submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. Provide the Owner with three (3) copies of printed instructions indicating

various pieces of equipment by name and model number, complete with

parts lists, maintenance and repair instructions.

C. COPIES OF SHOP DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE AS OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.




D. This information shall be bound in plastic hardbound notebooks with the job

name, Architect and Engineer names permanently embossed on the cover.

Rigid board dividers with labeled tabs shall be provided for different pieces

of equipment. Submit manuals to the Architect for approval.

E. In addition to the operation and maintenance brochure, the Contractor

shall provide a separate brochure which shall include registered warranty

certificates on all equipment, especially any pieces of equipment which

carry warranties exceeding one (1) year.

F. The operation and maintenance brochure shall be furnished with a detailed

list of all equipment furnished to the project, including the serial number and

all pertinent nameplate data such as voltage, amperage draw,

recommended fuse size, rpm, etc. The Contractor shall include this data on

each piece of equipment furnished under this contract.

1.14 GUARANTEE:

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship

for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the

project. This guarantee shall include furnishing of all labor and material

necessary to make any repairs, adjustments or replacement of any

equipment, parts, etc. necessary to restore the project to first class condition.

This guarantee shall exclude only the changing of lamps. Warranties

exceeding one (1) year are hereinafter specified with individual pieces of

equipment.

B. If the Contractor’s office is in excess of a fifty (50) mile radius of the project,

he shall appoint a local qualified contractor to perform any emergency

repairs or adjustments

required during the guarantee period. The name of the contractor

appointed to provide emergency services shall be submitted to the

Architect for his approval.

1.15 CLEANING:

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL CLEANING for

general requirements for final cleaning.

B. Clean all light fixtures, lamps and lenses prior to final acceptance. Replace

all inoperative lamps.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WIRES AND CABLES



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,

including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this

section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,

and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to wires and cables

specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and

schedules. (MC Cable is not allowed for use on this project).

B. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section

include the following:

1. Copper conductors.

2. Split-bolt connectors.

3. Wirenut connectors.

4. MC Cable (Not permitted for branch circuits feeding O.R. Rooms)


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire

and cable products of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products

have been in satisfactory use in similar service.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with of successful installation experience with

projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling work similar to that required for

this project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to

construction, installation and color coding of electrical wires and cables.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 83,

"Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables", and Std 486A, "Wire Connectors

and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors".




E. UL Compliance: Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are

UL-listed and labeled.

F. ETL Compliance: Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are

ETL-listed and labeled.

G. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Std Pub/No.'s WC 5,

"Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution

of Electrical Energy", and WC-30, "Color Coding of Wires and Cables",

pertaining to electrical power type wires and cables.

H. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3,

8 and D-753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than

98% at 20 deg C (68 deg F).


A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory-fabricated type

containers, or wound on NEMA-specified type wire and cable reels.

B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect

products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.

C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing

wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance

integrity of wires/cables is maintained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRE, CABLE AND CONNECTORS

A. General: Provide electrical wires, cables, and connectors of manufacturer's

standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed

and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete

installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated,

provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 deg

C (68 deg F).

B. Building Wires: Provide factory-fabricated wire of sizes, ampacity ratings,

and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated,

provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's

installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. Select from the

following UL types, those wires with construction features which fulfill project

requirements:




1. Type THW: For dry and wet locations; max operating temperature

75 deg C (167 deg F). Insulation, flame-retardant,

moisture- and heat-resistant, thermoplastic; conductor,

annealed copper.

2. Type THWN: For dry and wet locations; max operating temperature

75 deg C (167 deg F). Insulation, flame-retardant,

moisture- and heat-resistant, thermoplastic; outer

covering, nylon jacket; conductor, annealed copper.

3. Type THHN: For dry and damp locations; max operating

temperature 90 deg C (194 deg F). Insulation, heat-

resistant thermoplastic flame-retardant, nylon jacket;

conductor, annealed copper.

C. Connectors:

1. General: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated, metal connectors of

sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications

and for services indicated.

D. Cables:

1. MC Cable: Conductors to be solid copper; insulated; corrugated

metal sheath - constructed and installed in strict accordance with

NEC Article 330. (MC may be utilized on circuits specifically denoted

on panel schedules on the drawings)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with

applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of

Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and

equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation

of wires/cables with other work.

C. Install UL Type THW, THWN, or THHN wiring in conduit, for all circuits.

D. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in

same raceway.

E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must

not deteriorate conductor or insulation.




F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave

wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where

manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors

and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A and

B.


A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with

megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure

requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for

short-circuits.

C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct

malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

D. Color Coding shall be as follows:

1. 120/208 volt circuits: Phase A - Black; Phase B - Red; Phase C - Blue;

Neutral - White; Ground - Green.

2. 277/480 volt circuits: Phase A - Brown; Phase B - Orange; Phase C -

Yellow; Neutral - Gray; Ground - Green w/stripe.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SUPPORTING DEVICESMOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION SECTION 260529


PART 1 - GENERAL





section.


and is a part of each Division-26 section making reference to electrical

supporting devices specified herein.


A. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include

the following:

1. Riser clamps.

2. C-clamps.

3. One-hole conduit straps.

4. Two-hole conduit straps.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting

devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with successful installation experience with

projects utilizing electrical supporting device work similar to that required for

project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to

construction and installation of electrical supporting devices.

D. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors

Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners,

hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.

E. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL-listed and

labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES



A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's

standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published

product information, and as required for complete installation; and as herein

specified. Where more than one type of supporting device meets indicated

requirements, selection is Installer's option.

B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types indicated:

1. Riser Clamps

2. Reducing Couplings

3. C-Clamps

4. One-Hole Conduit Straps

5. Two-Hole Conduit Straps

C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types indicated:

1. Lead Expansion Anchors

2. Toggle Bolts

D. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting

electrical equipment, 12-gage hot-dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes

indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with

standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match

with U-channel:

1. Fixture hangers.

2. Channel hangers.

3. End caps.

4. Beam clamps.

5. Wiring stud.

6. Thin wall conduit clamps.

7. Rigid conduit clamps.

8. Conduit hangers.

9. U-bolts.

2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: (ALL CABLES SHALL BE “SLEEVED” AS SPECIFIED)

A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube

closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded

longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gage metals: 3" and

smaller, 20-gage.

2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe;

remove burrs.



B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrates foundation walls

below grade, or exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with

non-toxic, UL-classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to

insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with

requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work,

as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.

C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly

from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal

conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible.

Install supports with spacings indicated and in compliance with NEC

requirements.

D. Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturer's recommended

values. Ensure that sealing grommets expand to form watertight seal.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA RACEWAYS



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1

Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to electrical

raceways specified herein.


A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following:

1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). (Branch circuits run above ceilings).

2. Flexible metal conduit. (Final connection to light fixtures in suspended

acoustical ceilings and to mech equipment located indoors).

3. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. (Final connection to all equipment

located outdoors or in un-conditioned spaces).

4. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. (Raceways run below grade or in

slab).(Not permitted for circuits serving O.R. Rooms)


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems

of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in

similar service.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with of successful installation experience on

projects with electrical raceway work similar to that required for this project.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA

Standards Publications pertaining to raceways.

2. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements

of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems.

Provide raceway products and components which have been

UL-listed and labeled.




3. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC

pertaining to construction and installation of raceway systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes

and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and

grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer

to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for

raceways.

1. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1. Formed from continuous length of

spirally wound, interlocked zinc-coated strip steel.

2. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal

conduit; construct of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and

double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside; coat with

liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

3. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with

flexible steel conduit of threadless hinged clamp type.

a. Straight Terminal Connectors: One piece body, female end

with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing

conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut.

b. 45 or 90 Degree Terminal Angle Connectors: Two-piece body

construction with removable upper section, female end with

clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit,

and male threaded end provided with locknut.

4. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide cadmium plated,

malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and

neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated, or noninsulated throat.

5. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide galvanized steel hot-dipped

zinc galvanized tubing with smooth corrosion resistant interior wall.

Tubing shall bare the U.L. label and conform to UL 797 and ANSI 680.3

installation shall be in accordance with National Electrical Code

Article 348. All outdoor fittings shall be compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS

A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and

weights for each service indicated.

1. Electrical Plastic Conduit: (Not allowed for circuits serving Patient

Care Areas.)




a. Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 C, UL-rated, construct of

polyvinyl chloride and conforming to NEMA TC-2, for direct

burial, or normal above ground use, UL-listed and in conformity

with NEC Article 347.

2. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3, mate and match to

conduit or tubing type and material.

3. Conduit, and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct

accessories of types, sizes and materials, complying with

manufacturer's published product information, which mate and

match conduit and tubing.

B. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types,

shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC requirements.

Construct conduit bodies with threaded- conduit-entrance ends, removable

covers, either cast or of galvanized steel, and corrosion-resistant screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed,

and substrate which will support raceways. Notify contractor in writing of

conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed

with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner

acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS

A. General: Install raceways in accordance with manufacturers' written

installation instructions, and in compliance with NEC and NECA's "Standard

of Installation". Install units plumb and level, and maintain manufacturer's

recommended clearances.

B. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, boxes, and panel work,

as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and

components with other work.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS

A. General: Install conduits concealed in new construction work, either in walls,

slabs, or above hung ceilings. Run conduits concealed in existing work

where practicable. Where conduits can not be concealed in finished areas,

use surface metal raceways.




1. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and

raceways for conductors to form continuous electrical conductor.

Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide

electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly.

2. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate

possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat

surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.

3. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece

unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically

designed and manufactured for their particular application. Install

expansion fittings in raceways every 200' linear run or wherever

structural expansion joints are crossed.

4. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished by

supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after

receiving review of dimensions and after checking location with other

trades.

5. Provide nylon pull cord in empty conduits where indicated. Test

conduits required to be installed, but left empty, test with ball

mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects ball mandrel. Pay costs

involved for restoration of conduit and surrounding surfaces to original

condition. The pull-line shall be a high strength, self-lubricated

polyolefin line, ro braided nature, with a minimum diameter of 3/16"

and a minimum breaking strength of 500 pounds. The line shall be

guaranteed against rust or mildew. The line shall be GB Electrical, Inc.

Poly-Pull, catalog number PL235 or equal.

B. Conduit Installation:

1. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of the

following conditions:

a. Exterior location.

b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be

expected to accumulate.

c. Corrosive atmosphere.

d. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.

e. Final 24" of connection to motors, or control items subject to

movement or vibration.

2. Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall

conduit deep and clean.

3. Field-bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to

distort nor vary internal diameter.

4. Size conduits to meet NEC, except no conduit smaller than 3/4 inch

shall be embedded in concrete or masonry.




5. Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by 2 locknuts,

and terminate with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside

enclosure.

6. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts, or ventilating duct openings.

7. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues,

hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever possible, install

horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

8. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.

9. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited.

Where required, use 3-piece union or split coupling.

10. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting

installation of cables/wires within raceways.

C. Concealed Conduits:

1. Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or

outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion inhibiting

compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and

conduit sufficiently tight to ensure watertightness.

2. For floors-on-grade, install conduits under concrete slabs.

3. Install underground conduits minimum of 24" below finished grade.

D. Conduits in Concrete Slabs:

1. Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing

steel.

2. Place conduits either parallel, or at 90 degrees, to main reinforcing

steel.

3. Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit to

ensure proper concrete bond.

4. Conduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by

Engineer.

5. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed 1/3 of slab thickness.

E. Install conduits as not to damage or run through structural members. Avoid

horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls.

F. Aboveground Conduits:

1. Install all conduit systems neatly, parallel with, or at right angles to

walls of building.

2. Install conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or

ventilation ducts or outlets.




3. Support all conduits by use of hangers, clamps, or clips. Support

conduits on each side of bends and on spacing not to exceed

following: up to 1": 6'-0"; 1-1/4" and over: 8'-0".

4. Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors for

supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.

G. Non-Metallic Conduits:

1. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations

of manufacturer.

2. Install PVC conduits in accordance with NEC and in compliance with

local utility practices.

H. Conduit Fittings:

1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp

edge for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for

proper fastening.

2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are to have

flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent

injury to cable insulation.

3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1-1/4" and

larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper

edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing.

4. Bushing of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding

terminal.

5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions,

split couplings, and plugs to be specifically designed for their

particular application.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS

A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures, and raceways for

conductors to form continuous electrical conductor, and connect to

electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical

continuity and rigid mechanical assembly.

1. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate

possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat

all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.

2. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion

joints are crossed.

3. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings,

supplied by raceway manufacturer. No field bends of raceway

section will be permitted.




4. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by

structural materials. Raceways are not to span any space

unsupported.

5. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction

pull or devices boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy"

boxes, etc. shall not be permitted for use with surface raceway

installations. Use appropriate finished surface box for use with specific

device or “bell” boxes wherein knockouts are not visible.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS



PART 1 - GENERAL





B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part

of each Division-26 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and

fittings specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical box and associated electrical fitting work is indicated by

drawings and schedules.

B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes.

2. Junction boxes.

3. Pull boxes.

4. Bushings.

5. Locknuts.

6. Knockout closures.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes

and fittings, of types, sizes and capacities required, whose products have

been in satisfactory use in similar service.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with of successful installation experience on

projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar to those required for this

project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and

installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL

514-Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide

electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled.




E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA

Stds/Pub no.'s OS1, OS2, and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes,

covers and box supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS

A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring

boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as

required for installation at respective locations. Provide outlet boxes with

mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in

bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with

corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and

device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. Boxes in metal

stud walls shall have type “H” bracket.

B. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each

installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard

hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for

supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used

to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations.

C. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel

non-gangable device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes,

including box depths as required for installation at respective locations.

Provide device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with

cable-size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw

holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and

corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps, and for equipment

type grounding. Boxes in metal stud walls shall have type “H” bracket.

D. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for

each installation, including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch

box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners,

which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation

requirements for individual wiring situations.

E. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal raintight outlet

wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with

threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast-metal face

plates with spring-hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each

application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and

fasteners.




F. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction

and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each

respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with

stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. All lighting and power junction

box covers shall be permanently labeled identifying contents (i.e. panel

designation and circuit numbers).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and

NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized

industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. All boxes installed in “fire rated walls” shall receive UL Classified Firestop Putty

Pads (manufactured by Spec Seal or equivalent).

C. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring

devices, and raceway installation work.

D. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to

weather or moisture.

E. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have

been removed.

F. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to

enclosed electrical wiring.

G. Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150

mm) separation.

H. Avoid installing aluminum products in concrete.

I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box,

which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with

locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces.

K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces

to whch attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.




L. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.

M. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris

and damage.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Upon completion of installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and

demonstrate compliance with requirements.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENTMOHS SUITE & RESOURCE ROOM ADDITION SECTION 260535


PART 1 - GENERAL





B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part

of each Divisions 22 and 23 and 26 section making reference to electrical

connections specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and

schedules. Electric connections are hereby defined to include connections

used for providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section

includes the following:

1. To all mechanical equipment provided and set-in-place by Divisions

21, 22 and 23 Contractor.

2. From electrical source to motor starters.

3. From motor starters to motors.

4. To lighting fixtures.

5. To grounds including earthing connections.

6. To all Owner furnished equipment.

7. To all equipment specified in all Divisions furnished and set in place by

others.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical

connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary

connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, electrical flux, and

cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with successful installation experience on

projects utilizing electrical connection for equipment similar to that required

for this project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type

products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals

and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.



D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with Std 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for

Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections

and terminations.

E. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and

ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical

connections for equipment.

F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering

Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to,

tightening of electrical

connectors to torque valves indicated. Provide electrical connection

products and materials which are UL-listed and -labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete

assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure

connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder,

electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties,

solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete

splices and termination of types indicated.

B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades,

sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service.

Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection

as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply

with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying

with Division-26 basic electrical materials and methods section

"Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing of metal

conduit, tubing and fittings:

a. EMT fittings.

b. Flexible metal conduit.

c. Flexible metal conduit fittings.

d. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.

e. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings.

C. Wire, Cable and Connectors:

1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with

Division-26 basic materials and methods section "Wires and Cables".

2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables

(conductors) for electrical connections which match, including sizes



and ratings, of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power.

Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at

20 deg C (68 deg F).

3. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and

terminals which mate and match, including sizes and ratings with

equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment

manufacturer for intended applications.

4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape,

heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder,

electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for

use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for

equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions

detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work

until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner

acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Install electrical connections in accordance with connector manufacturer's

written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying

with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of

Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and

equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of

electrical connections for equipment with other work.

C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring

diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper

interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

D. Cover Splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater

insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those

conductors being spliced.

E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket,

and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where

cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through

tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper

conductors while skinning wire.



F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to

facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening

values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper

torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and

ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's

torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals

to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry

has been energized with rated power source, test connections to

demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that

direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct

malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA PANELBOARDS



PART 1 - GENERAL





section.

B. Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work

specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout

boxes, is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein.

B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the

following:

1. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

panelboards and enclosures.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with successful installation experience on

projects utilizing panelboards.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code

requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as

applicable to installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and

enclosures.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric

Panelboards", and UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to




panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelboard units which

are UL-listed and labeled.

C. Special-Use Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special-use,

with appropriate UL markings which indicate that they are suitable for

special type of use/application.

D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. 250, "Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)," Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards,"

and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less."

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with installation of

wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

panelboard products of one of the following (for each type and rating of

panelboard and enclosure):

1. Square D Company.

2. General Electric

2.2 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures

and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which

comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and

construction in accordance with published product information; equip with

proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete

installation. (Series Rated Panels are not acceptable).

B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards:

1. The panel box shall not be less than 20" wide and fabricated from

galvanized steel. Panelboard box is to have separate UL label and

minimum wire bending and gutter requirements to meet the NEC and

UL standards. Wiring gutters shall be completely free of any part of

trim clamp to prevent damaging wiring insulation.




2. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled. Bus bars and

breaker branch bus shall be 98% conductivity copper. Panelboard

bus structure and main breaker or main lugs shall have current ratings

as shown on the plans or as indicated in panel schedule. Such ratings

shall be established by heat rise tests in accordance with UL Standard

UL 67. Bus bars shall be supported by glass-filled polyester type

insulators. All bolts used to connect current carrying parts together

shall be case hardened, thread forming type and be accessible for

tightening from the front of the panel. Dead front to be provided with

flange for easy attachment of trim. Neutral bussing shall have a lug

for each outgoing branch requiring a neutral connection.

3. The panel trim shall be surface or flush as indicated on the panel

schedules. It shall be fabricated from cold-rolled steel, painted with

an ANSI-61 light gray baked-on enamel and equipped with

concealed hinges, flush lock and a welded frame for circuit directory

card. (Provide door-in-door construction).

4. Branch devices shall be “bolt-on” thermal magnetic molded case

circuit breakers.

5. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip. Bus sequence shall start at

the top left phase bus of the interior for both top and bottom fed

panels. Provisions for future breakers shall be located at the bottom

of the panel and be fully bussed complete with all necessary

mounting hardware less the breaker. Anti-turn solderless, pressure

type connectors shall be provided suitable for aluminum/copper

wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are

to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to

proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS

A. Install panelboards and enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's

"Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry

practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening

values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing




requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply

with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B.

C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they

are permanently and mechanically anchored.

D. Provide properly wired electrical connections for panelboards within

enclosures.

E. Fill out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation

work. Directory shall be typewritten.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as

indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified

in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.


A. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections

to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.

B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester

phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure

requirements are fulfilled.

C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits,

and for short-circuits.


A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and

demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where

necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate

compliance.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA WIRING DEVICES



PART 1 - GENERAL






and is a part of each Division-26 section making reference to wiring devices

specified herein.


A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:

1. Receptacles.

2. Ground-fault circuit interrupters.

3. Switches

4. Wallplates.

5. Plugs and connectors.

6. Occupancy Sensors


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring

devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Qualified with successful installation experience on

projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those required for this project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and wiring

of electrical wiring devices.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 20, 486A, 498

and 943 pertaining to installation of wiring devices. Provide wiring devices

which are UL-listed and labeled.

E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Std 241,

"Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial

Buildings", pertaining to electrical wiring systems.




F. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA Stds Pub/No.

WD 1, "General-Purpose Wiring Devices", and WD 5, "Specific-Purpose Wiring

Devices".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering wiring devices which may be incorporated in the

work include the following:

1. General Electric Co.

2. Harvey Hubbell Inc.

3. Leviton Mfg Co.

2.2 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and

electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA

Stds Pub/No. WD 1. Provide ivory color devices and nylon wallplates except

as otherwise selected by the Architect.

B. Receptacles:

1. Heavy-Duty Duplex: Provide heavy-duty duplex receptacles, 2- pole,

3-wire grounding,20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears,

design for side and back

wiring with spring loaded, screw activated pressure plate, with NEMA

configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.(Hospital grade in O.R.

and Lab).

2. Ground-Fault Interrupter: Provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit

interrupters, with heavy-duty duplex receptacles, capable of

protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, and

of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter,

grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20-amperes rating,

120-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling;

with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level; equip with NEMA

configuration 5-20R.

3. Exterior duplex shall be UL listed and labeled “WR” - Weather

Resistant.




C. Plugs and Connectors:

1. Plugs: Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts, 3-wire, grounding, armored cap

plugs, parallel blades with cord clamp, and 0.4" cord hole; match

NEMA configuration with power source's.

2. Connectors: Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts, bakelite-body armored

connectors, 3-wire, grounding, parallel blades, double wipe contact,

with cord clamp, and 0.4" cord hole, match NEMA configuration to

mating plug's.

D. Switches:

1. Snap: Provide heavy-duty flush single-pole toggle switches, 20-

ampere, 120/277V AC, with mounting yoke insulated from

mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle, and side wired

screw terminals. (Hubbell HBL 1221I).

2. Three Way: Provide heavy-duty flush 3-way AC switches, 20-amperes,

120/277 volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip

with plastic ears, lock type switch handles, side-wired screw terminals,

with break-off tab features, which allows wiring with separate or

common feed. (Hubbell HBL 12231).

3. Occupancy Sensors

a. Occupancy Sensors shall have a Patented Dual Technology

(PDT) and shall be ceiling or wall mounted unless otherwise

noted. PDT sensor shall combine Passive Infrared (PIR)

technology with Ultrasonic (sound) technology.

b. The Occupancy Sensors shall have an Operating Voltage of

120/277VAC @ 60 Hz. (Fluorescent Load: 1000W @ 120V).

c. Occupancy sensors shall be UL listed (UL 3D62) commercial

grade.

2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of

types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which

mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal

screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish

of plates. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction

features:

1. Material and Finish: Nylon (Plastic is not acceptable)

B. Exterior coverplates shall be Hubbell WP8M “Raintight while-in-use” - metallic.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. Install wiring devices in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions,

applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and

in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project

requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring

work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from

excess building materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Install galvanized steel wall plates in unfinished spaces.

E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

F. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in


values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are

not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening

torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque

indicating hand tool.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES

A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding

proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial

Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including

those burned and scored by faulty plugs.3.3 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless

otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques

specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3.4 TESTING

A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and

for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.




Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance

with requirements.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES



PART 1 - GENERAL





B. Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work

specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent, location, and details of interior lighting fixture work are indicated on

drawings and in schedules.

B. Types of interior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:

1. Fluorescent

2. LED

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation

instructions on each type interior building lighting fixture and component.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate

sheet for each fixture, assembled in "luminaire type" alphabetical or

numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on

each sheet. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each

interior lighting fixture and accessory; including "trouble- shooting"

maintenance guide. Include that data, product data, and shop drawings

in a maintenance manual; in accordance with general requirements of

Division 1.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

interior lighting fixtures of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products

have been in satisfactory use in similar service.




B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with successful installation experience on

projects with interior lighting fixture work similar to that required for this

project.

C. Codes and Standards

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code

requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220,

410, and 510 as applicable to installation, and construction of interior

building lighting fixtures.

2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA

Stds Pub/No.'s LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment.

3. IES Compliance: Comply with IES pertaining to office lighting

practices and illuminance recommendations..

4. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards, including UL 486A and B,

pertaining to interior lighting fixtures. Provide interior lighting fixtures

and components which are UL-listed and labeled.


A. DELIVER interior lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or

wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage.

B. Store interior lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside

well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme

temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.

C. Handle interior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and

scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace

with new.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and

fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of interior lighting

fixtures with other work.

B. Sequence interior lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility

of damage and soiling during remainder of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURES




A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated;

complete with, but not limited to, housings, energy- efficient lamps, lamp

holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship fixtures

factory-assembled, with those components required for a complete

installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches,

with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to

dampen ballast generated noise.

B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixture suitable for connecting to

branch circuit wiring as follows:

1. NEC Type AF for 120 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. NEC Type SF-2 for 277 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG.

C. Electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps: Electronic ballasts shall be provided

with integral leads, color coded to ANSI standard C82.11. Ballasts shall

operate lamps at a frequency of 20KHZ, have a power factor greater than

98%, and a crest factor of less than 1.7. The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

shall be less than 20%, and have a noise rating of Class A or better. The

ballasts shall be UL listed and CSA Certified. The ballasts shall have a 5 year

warranty.

1. The ballasts shall be Osram Sylvania Plus 60

D. Lamps:(Osram Sylvania Plus 60 - 5 year warranty)

1. Provide linear fluorescent lamps of energy saving, cool white, types

as follows:

a. (T8, 48", 32 watt, 24,000 hrs; 2950 Lumens, 85 CRI; 2500K).

2. Provide compact fluorescent lamps as follows:

a. 32TTT:5.5"; 2200 Lumens; 32 Watts, 82 CRI, 3500K, 12,000 hrs.

b. 42TTT: .6.4"; 3200 Lumens, 42 Watts, 82 CRI, 3500K, 12,000 hrs.

E. LED: Fixtures including LED’s and drivers shall have 10-year manufacturer

warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be

installed, and substrate for supporting lighting fixtures.




B. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion

of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in

accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable

requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and

with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill

requirements.

B. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support

fixture weight.

C. Install flush mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between

fixture frame and finished surface.

D. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended

grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent

distortion during handling.

E. Fasten fixtures securely to structural supports; and ensure that pendant

fixtures are plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures

longer than 2 feet with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball

aligners and provisions for minimum one inch vertical adjustment. Mount

continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than

number of fixtures in the row.

F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in


values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing

requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply

with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National

Electrical Code.

G. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2 feet in length at a point in

addition to the outlet box fixture stud.


A. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures

which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and

testing, as judged by Architect.




B. Refer to Division-1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in

interior lighting fixtures, where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of

Substantial Completion.


A. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon

completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction

period.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for interior lighting fixtures as

indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified

in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building

circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate

capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct

malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.


DERMATOLOGY ASSOCIATESOF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA EXTERIOR LIGHTING



PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,


Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and

accessories.

B. Where a “Standard Specification” (i.e. ANSI, UL, etc.) is referenced and no

manufacturers are listed the Contractor shall submit manufacturers for Prior

Approval in adherence with the specified standard, and in accordance with

Section 260500.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fixture: A complete lighting unit. Fixtures include a lamp or lamps and parts

required to distribute the light, position and protect lamps, and connect

lamps to the power supply.

B. Lighting Unit: A fixture, or an assembly of fixtures with a common support,

including a pole or bracket plus mounting and support accessories.

C. Luminaire: A fixture.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, poles, and

accessories. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture

designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the

following:

a. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal

features.




2. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.


A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and

installation.

B. Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures and accessories that are listed and

labeled for their indicated use and location on the Project.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical

Code," Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualification: A "Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Manufacturers' Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing lighting

units that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a

record of successful in-service performance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs and sharp edges and corners.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, except as

indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not

warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed fixtures.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access Provisions: Smooth operating, free

from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit

relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and

other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when

secured in the operating position. Provide for door removal for cleaning or

replacing lens. Arrange for door opening to disconnect ballast.

E. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

F. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise




indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat- and aging-

resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor mounting in

fixture doors.

2.2 LAMPS

A. Conform to ANSI Standards, C78 series, applicable to each type of lamp.

Provide fixtures with indicated lamps. Where lamps are not indicated,

provide lamps recommended by manufacturer.

2.3 FINISH

A. Metal Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish except as otherwise indicated.

Finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays,

stains, blisters, and similar defects. Remove poles, fixtures, and accessories

showing evidence of corrosion or finish failure during Project warranty period

and replace with new items.

B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish except as otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set units plumb, square, level, and secure according to manufacturer's

written instructions and shop drawings.

B. Fixture Attachment: Fasten to structural supports.

C. Fixture Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach fixtures and

supports to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.

D. Lamp fixtures with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's instructions.

Replace malfunctioning lamps.


A. Inspect installed units for damage.




B. Tests: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing fixtures and

energizing circuits with normal power source.

C. Replace or repair damaged and malfunctioning units and retest.


A. Clean components on completion of installation. Use methods and

materials recommended by manufacturer.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SITE CLEARING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Removal of surface vegetation.

B. Clearing and grubbing.


A. Accurately record locations of utilities, rerouting of utilities (if required), and new utilities by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts and slope gradients. Transmit information to Architect to be included in project record documents.

1.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.

C. Protect above grade and below grade utilities which are to remain.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. As specified in Section 312010 - Earthwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work; notify Architect.

3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. This work consists of required clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of vegetation and debris within limits shown on Drawings.

B. Cut and remove timber, logs, brush, stumps and debris.

C. Excavate and remove all stumps, roots over 2" in diameter, submerged logs, snags, and other perishable and objectionable material.


OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA SITE CLEARING



1. Undisturbed stumps, roots and nonperishable soil objects which will be a minimum of two feet below finish grade will be permitted to remain.

2. Explosives may not be used.

3. Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which obstructions are removed shall be backfilled and compacted per Section 02220.

4. Burning of material on site shall not be permitted.

D. Legally dispose of removed material and clean up area to be cleared.

E. Protect and preserve all vegetation shown on Drawings to remain. In case of damages to bark, trunks, limbs or roots of vegetation to remain, repair such damage without additional compensation, by corrective pruning, bark tracing, wood painting and other acceptable horticultural and tree surgery practice.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA EARTH MOVING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Finish grade site to required contours and elevations.


A. Accurately record locations of utilities, rerouting of utilities, and new utilities by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts and slope gradients. Transmit information to Architect to be included in project record documents.

1.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

B. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.

C. Protect above grade and below grade utilities which are to remain.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Excavated material which has been approved for reuse, graded free of roots, rocks larger than one inch, subsoil, debris, and large weeds.

B. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 6", rocks larger than 3" and all debris.

C. Bank Sand or Non-Active Sandy Clays: Clean and free from trash, debris, broken masonry, roots, vegetable matter, organic matter and unsuitable material.

1. Plasticity Index: Not more than 20.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Identify known below grade utilities. Stake and flag locations.

C. Identify and flag above grade utilities.

D. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which cross work area.





E. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work; notify Architect.

3.2 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded and stockpile in area designated on site. Remove excess topsoil not being reused from site.

B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.

3.3 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil as required and remove from site unless approved for topsoil use.

B. Do not excavate wet subsoil.

C. When excavation through roots of trees scheduled to remain is necessary, perform work by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe.

D. Rough grade the neutral ground between Owner's property and street curbs to required levels, profiles, contours, and elevations ready for finish grading.

3.4 FILL OVER UNDISTURBED SUBSOIL

A. Prior to placing fill material over undisturbed subsoil, scarify the surface to a depth of 6".

3.5 FINAL GRADING

A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1" in size. Remove subsoil contaminated with petroleum products.

B. Scarify subgrade to depth of 3" where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas where construction equipment has compacted topsoil.

C. Place fill in low areas.

D. Fine grade subsoil eliminating rough or low areas. Maintain levels, profiles, and contours of subgrade.

E. Remove stone, roots, grass, weeds, debris, and foreign material while spreading.

F. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping topsoil.





3.6 SURPLUS MATERIAL

A. Remove surplus materials from site.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA EARTHWORK



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Excavate as required for structure foundations. Provide under-slab fill, backfill, and rough grade.

B. Shore and brace excavations as required.

C. Excavate for services within building to other buildings and/or to utilities serving project.

D. Cap off and seal discontinued utility services and remove from site portions of lines within excavated areas.

E. Place and compact granular beds and fills to rough grade elevations.

F. Dewater excavations as required. Grade around excavations to prevent surface water run-off into excavated area.



B. ANSI/ASTM C136-Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

C. ANSI/ASTM D698-Tests for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture Using 5.5lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 inch (305 mm) Drop.

D. ANSI/ASTM D1556-Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method.

E. ANSI/ASTM D1557-Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture Using 10lb Rammer and 18" Drop.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements

1.4 TESTING

A. Test compacted fill in accordance with Section 014000, as directed by Architect.

B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1556 and under provisions of Section 014000.

C. Tests and analysis of fill materials will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and ANSI/ASTM D1557 under provisions of Section 014000.

D. NORMAL BLDG. STD 95% STANDARD.





1.5 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 014300.

B. Submit 10lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in airtight containers.

1.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawn areas to receive planting, and other features remaining as part of final landscaping.

B. Protect benchmarks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against damage from vehicular or foot traffic.

C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods as required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations.

D. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structure that may be damaged by excavation work. This includes service lines and pipe chases.

E. Notify Architect of any unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work in the area until Architect has provided notification to resume work.

F. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Reference Sheet S1)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify stockpiled fill to be reused is approved.

B. Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation has been inspected.

C. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and surfaces are not frozen.

3.2 PREPARATION AND LAYOUT

A. Establish the extent of excavation by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum elevation.

B. Set required lines and levels.

C. Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points.





D. When necessary, compact sub-grade surfaces to density requirements for back fill material.

3.3 STRIPPING

A. Prior to fill placement, remove all vegetation and existing fill a depth of 24" below existing grade.

B. Roll exposed surface with a loaded dump truck to detect any soft spots. Make two passes over site, each perpendicular to one another. Excavate any such soft spots to firm material and back fill a described below.

3.4 UTILITIES

A. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area.

B. Notify utility companies having jurisdiction to remove and relocate lines that are in the way of excavation.

C. Maintain, re-route or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area. Pay costs for this work which are not paid for by utility company.

D. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation.

E. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug, or seal such lines and identify at grade.

F. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines re-routed or extended on project record documents.

3.5 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate the sub-soil in accordance with lines and levels required for construction of the work, including space for forms, bracing and shoring, foundation drainage system, and to permit inspection.

B. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints.

C. Do additional excavation only by written authorization of Architect.

D. Fill over-excavated areas under pipe bearing surfaces in accordance with requirements for Backfilling in this Section.

E. When complete, verify soil bearing capacities, depths, and dimensions.

F. Correct any unauthorized excavation as directed.





G. Fill over excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces with select soil and compact to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry weight as determined in the laboratory in accordance with ASTM D698 procedures.

H. Excavations are not to interfere with normal 45-degree bearing splay of any foundation.

I. Remove excavated material from site.

J. Removal of boulders, buried rock, etc. in excess of 1/2 cu. yd. may be authorized as an extra; other work is deemed to be within the scope of this section.

3.6 TRENCHING

A. Excavate in accordance with lines and grades.

B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of services and to allow for inspection.

C. Do not disturb soil within branch spreading of existing trees or shrubs that are to remain. If it is necessary to excavate through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with a sharp ax.

D. When complete, request the Architect to inspect excavations. Correct unauthorized excavation as directed at no cost to the Owner.

E. Stockpile excavated sub-soil for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated sub-soil from site.

3.7 DEWATERING

A. Keep trenches dry. Provide necessary equipment including pumps, piping, and temporary drains.

B. Do not discharge drainage water lines into municipal sewers without municipal approval. Ensure water discharge does not contain silt held in suspension.

C. Direct the surface drainage away from excavated areas.

D. Control the grading in and adjacent to excavations to prevent water running into excavated areas or onto adjacent properties or public thoroughfares.

E. Furnish and operate suitable pumps on a 24-hour basis to keep excavations free of water until services have been placed and backfilling is complete.





3.8 BACKFILLING

A. Stockpile fill material in areas designated by Owner.

B. Do not start backfilling operations until building drainage system and utility services have been inspected.

C. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from building debris, snow, ice and water, and that ground surfaces are not in frozen condition.

D. Do not backfill over existing sub-grade surfaces that are porous, wet or spongy.

1. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade. Backfill with sub soil and compact with mechanical vibrators to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry unit weight as determined in lab by means of ASTM D698 procedures.

E. Compact existing sub-grade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill materials.

F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels, and elevations.

G. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. Backfill work shall commence at least 14 days after the casting of the slabs at the first floor.

H. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth. Use a method so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system or utilities.

I. Place gravel, pea gravel and sand mixture to cover piping by at least 18". Compact to minimum of 95% maximum dry weight.

J. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract the imbalance. Leave shoring in place until balanced pressure condition is achieved.

3.9 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

A. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls: Fill with approved sub-soil to top of subgrade elevations. Compact with mechanical vibrators to a minimum 95% of the maximum dry weight.

B. Under Structures: Fill with select soil. Compact with mechanical vibrators to a minimum 95% of the maximum density as measured by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor).





C. Stabilizing Base Course Under Concrete Slabs Within Building Area: 4" of sand fill to underside of slabs. Compact with mechanical vibrators to a minimum 95% of the maximum dry weight.

3.10 SURPLUS MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus excavated and unsuitable materials from site and legally dispose.

B. Leave stockpiles of materials approved by Architect completely free of all excess fill materials.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA TERMITE CONTROL



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Treatment of earth under and adjacent to building slabs.

1.2 MINIMUM COMPLIANCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with all applicable governmental standards for use and storage of these materials. Use these materials for this work only. Unauthorized use of these materials is strictly forbidden.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Warranty the work specified herein for five years against becoming unserviceable or causing the objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials or workmanship.

1. Warranty shall be renewable at end of 5-year period with inspection reports at in 1-year increments.

B. Defects shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Subterranean termite activity.

2. Damage of building materials caused by subterranean termites.

C. Include replacement of damaged materials caused by subterranean termites within the warranty period.

1.4 APPLICATOR

A. Applicator shall be bonded to perform this type of work.

B. Where local licensing is available or required, applicator shall be licensed to perform this type of work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Affidavit: Submit a signed affidavit immediately following application of termite treatment, verifying specification compliance of the materials, their proportions, and application.

B. Product Data: Submit schedules, charts, literature, product label, MSDS sheets and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.





1.6 SAFETY

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling of chemicals used as part of this Section.

B. Allow only properly trained personnel to apply these chemicals.

C. Comply with all governing regulations regarding storage, handling, application, and disposal of these chemicals.

D. All materials to be mixed at site location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Dilutent: Potable Water.

B. Solution Ratio: Provide a minimum working strength of one of the following by weight:

1. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, Mich., "Dursban TC - .75%".

2. ICI America, Wilmington, Del., "Demon TC - 0.5%".

3. Bayer Corporation, Kansas City, Mo., "Premise 75-0.5%".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Owner reserves right to retain an independent consultant as the supervisory authority to oversee the mixtures, applications and or treatments, disposals and clean-ups of all materials used by the applicator.

B. Notify the “supervising authority” before commencing work.

C. Do not apply materials to soils that are excessively wet.

3.2 UNDER-SLAB TREATMENT

A. Apply solution under area to receive slab, immediately prior to placing vapor barrier or waterproofing membrane.

B. Apply minimum of 1 gallon of working solution to 10 square feet of area.

3.3 TREATMENT AT SLAB PERIMETER

A. Treat perimeter of grade beams, slab, blockouts, etc.





B. Trench along outside of slab, 4" wide and 6" deep.

C. Apply working solution at rate of 2 gallons per 5 linear feet.

D. Mix working solution with soil as trench is being back filled. Cover treated soil with layer of untreated soil or other suitable barrier.

3.4 TREATMENT AT WALKS AND DRIVES

A. Where walks, drives, or other paving abuts building slab, treat prior to placement of concrete.

B. Apply working solution at holes at rate of 1 gallon per 5 linear feet.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove chemicals, containers, tools, etc. Handle and dispose in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA CONCRETE PAVING



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare Subgrade to receive base course materials for walks and paved courtyard.

B. Place and compact base course materials for pavement.

C. Concrete walks and paved courtyard.

D. Form work and expansion joints.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 033100 - Concrete Work



B. ASTM C150-86 - Portland cement.

C. ASTM C94-86 - Ready Mixed Concrete.

D. ASTM C260-86 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

F. ASTM C33-86 - Concrete Aggregates.

G. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

H. ASTM C309-81 - Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

I. ASTM D1557 - Tests for Moisture Density Relations of Soils using 110 pounds (4.5 kg) Rammer and 18 inch drop.

1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF CONCRETE

A. As required in accordance with Section 014000.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. General fill material under paving areas shall be of a non-expansive nature, having a liquid limit not to exceed 30 and a maximum plasticity index not to exceed 12. Fill material shall be clean and free from rubbish and organic materials.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: Portland cement, Type 1.

B. Fine Aggregates: Sand composed of clean, hard, durable uncoated grains free from an excess of salt or alkali conforming to ASTM C33.

C. Coarse Aggregates: Hard, durable gravel or crushed stone conforming to ASTM C33.

D. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material.

E. Chemical and mineral admixtures.

F. Curing compounds.

G. Joint materials, etc.

2.3 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES

A. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting, and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete.

B. Expansion Joint Material: Approved joint filler, 1/4" thick and sealant.

C. Keyways at construction joints. (Submit for Architect's approval).

2.4 CONCRETE MIX

A. Compressive strength at 28 days: 3,000 PSI.

B. For curbs and walks: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days.

C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when acceptable to Architect. Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement requirements.

1. Do not use calcium chloride.





D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE

A. Clean sub-grade of all debris; strip off all vegetation. Remove all soil containing organic materials from the area to be covered by paved areas.

1. Remove materials not to be used in fills and backfills from the site.

B. Scarify and re-compact the upper eight inches of native soil to 95% compaction as determined by ASTM D698.

C. Verify, establish and maintain accurately all lines and grades.

D. This Contractor shall be responsible for determining and accomplishing all cutting and filling required. Carry rough grading to necessary depth to allow for addition of paving base and paving.

E. Level and compact sub-grade to receive sand fill for concrete walks, curbs and gutters to a minimum of 95% of the maximum dry weight.

3.2 PLACEMENT OF FILL

A. Place fill as required over prepared Subgrade and compact. Prevent displacement.

B. During concrete placement, keep fill cushion sufficiently moist to prevent excessive absorption of water from freshly placed concrete.

3.3 FORMING

A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required lines and levels. Ensure form ties are not placed so as to pass through concrete.

B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and stripping and to prevent damage to concrete during formwork removal.

3.4 FORMING EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Place construction joints at end of concrete pours and where pours are stopped for more than 1/2 hour. Where possible, make joints of curbs coincide with joints in walks. When walks abut building, and as shown on drawings, provide continuous expansion joint.





B. Install joint filler and sealant at expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Provide dowel joint through expansion joints, with one end of dowels fitted with coping sleeve to allow free movement.

3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Provide control joints in sidewalk at 5-foot intervals. Provide control joints in paving at 10'-12' intervals. Where possible, make joints in walks coincide with joints in curbs.

B. Form control joints in the following manner:

1. Sawed joints shall be cut into cured concrete with powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades, 1/10" wide maximum.

2. When permitted, pre-molded filler strip inserts may be used. Inserts must be installed vertically, flush with the surface and continuous between edges.

3. When permitted, by grooving top portion of pavement with a recommended cutting tool.

4. Depth of control joint: 1/4 of concrete pavement thickness (1" minimum).

5. Provide joint sealant at all joints over 1/8" in width.

3.6 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE

A. Place concrete, screed, and float to a uniform finish free of open texturing and exposed aggregate.

B. Avoid working mortar to surface.

C. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels, or grades by more than 1/8" in 10' when measured with 10' straightedge.

D. Apply curing compound on finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.7 FINISHING

A. For walks and pavements: After troweling, slightly brush concrete surface to provide a slip resistant surface. Brush perpendicular to walking direction.

1. For paving areas provide slope of 1/8" in 12" minimum for drainage or to elevations indicated on drawings.

B. For ramps and other inclined surfaces: Provide a coarse, slip resistant finish by scoring surface with a stiff bristled broom.





C. Finish the edges of slabs, gutters, and back top edge of curb, with an edging tool and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown.

D. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.



OF SOUTHWEST LOUISIANA BENCHES

MOHS SUITE & RESORCE ROOM ADDITION SECTION 324000


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide perforated metal benches where indicated at exterior locations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings. Indicate profile, size, finish and mounting type.

B. Submit Manufacturers standard warranty and color selections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BENCHES

A. Provide 6’ long perforated metal bench by DuMor, Inc., Series 104 or approved equal.

B. Materials:

1. Seating surface: 10-gauge perforated.

2. Fasteners: Stainless Steel.

3. Finish: Zinc rich epoxy then finish with polyester powder coating.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all fasteners and other accessories as required for a complete and secure installation as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturers recommendations. Install square, level and secure.

B. Contractor shall verify exact placement in field with Architect.


Date post:	19-Jul-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	2 times
Download:	0 times